GLK-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515080213 Part no. 2045844383 Edition A 2014

É2045844383ÌËÍ2045844383

GLK-C

lass

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 31.10.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2045844383 É2045844383ÌËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 111

Climate control ................................. 127

Driving and parking .......................... 143

On-board computer and displays .... 219

Stowage and features ...................... 273

Maintenance and care ...................... 299

Breakdown assistance ..................... 313

Wheels and tires ............................... 329

Technical data ................................... 365

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 28512 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Function/notes ............................. 197

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 236Function/notes ................................ 67Important safety notes .................... 67Warning lamp ................................. 263

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 133Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 229Display message ............................ 253Function/information .................... 206Trailer towing ................................. 209

Active Driving Assistance package . 206Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 229Display message ............................ 252Function/information .................... 209Trailer towing ......................... 206, 212

Active light function ......................... 115Active Parking Assist

Canceling ....................................... 192Detecting parking spaces .............. 189Display message ............................ 253Exiting a parking space .................. 191Important safety notes .................. 188Parking .......................................... 190Towing a trailer .............................. 192

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 247Function/notes ............................. 116Switching on/off ................... 116, 117Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 372

Air bagsDisplay message ............................ 242Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 46Important safety notes .................... 44Knee bag .......................................... 46PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 49Pelvis air bag ................................... 48Safety guidelines ............................. 43Side impact air bag .......................... 47Window curtain air bag .................... 48

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 250AIR FLOW ........................................... 135Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 141Important safety notes .................. 140Rear ............................................... 141Setting ........................................... 140Setting the center air vents ........... 140Setting the side air vents ............... 140

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Approach/departure angle .............. 173Ashtray ............................................... 283Assistance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 228Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 228ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 300Hiding a service message .............. 300Notes ............................................. 300Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 300Service message ............................ 300Special service requirements ......... 301

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 74Function ........................................... 74Switching off the alarm .................... 74

4 Index

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 229Display message ............................ 251Function/notes ............................. 201

Audio menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 226Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 246see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 149Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 149Automatic headlamp mode .............. 113Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 156Changing gear ............................... 155DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 152Display message ............................ 258Driving tips .................................... 155Emergency running mode .............. 158Engaging drive position .................. 154Engaging neutral ............................ 153Engaging park positionautomatically ................................. 153Engaging reverse gear ................... 153Engaging the park position ............ 153Kickdown ....................................... 155Manual drive program .................... 156Overview ........................................ 152Problem (malfunction) ................... 158Program selector button ................ 155Pulling away ................................... 147Starting the engine ........................ 147Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 156Trailer towing ................................. 155Transmission position display ........ 153Transmission positions .................. 154

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 158

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 122Display message ............................ 245

Bag hook ............................................ 278Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 214Removing ....................................... 216Storing ........................................... 217

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 68Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 79Important safety notes .................... 78Replacing ......................................... 79

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 318Display message ............................ 249Important safety notes .................. 316Jump starting ................................. 320

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 229Display message ............................ 253Notes/function .............................. 202Trailer towing ................................. 204see Active Blind Spot Assist

BlueTECAdding DEF .................................... 162

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 370Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 238Notes ............................................. 372

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 244

BrakesABS .................................................. 67BAS .................................................. 68BAS PLUS ........................................ 68Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 372Display message ............................ 236Driving tips .................................... 168Important safety notes .................. 168Maintenance .................................. 169

Index 5

Parking brake ........................ 165, 169Warning lamp ................................. 263

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

CareCarpets .......................................... 312Car wash ........................................ 306Display ........................................... 310Exterior lights ................................ 309Gear or selector lever .................... 311Interior ........................................... 310Matte finish ................................... 308Notes ............................................. 305Paint .............................................. 307Plastic trim .................................... 310Power washer ................................ 307Rear view camera .......................... 309Roof lining ...................................... 312Seat belt ........................................ 312Seat cover ..................................... 311Sensors ......................................... 309Steering wheel ............................... 311Tail pipes ....................................... 310Trim pieces .................................... 311Washing by hand ........................... 306Wheels ........................................... 307Windows ........................................ 308Wiper blades .................................. 308Wooden trim .................................. 311

Cargo compartment cover ............... 278Cargo compartmentenlargement ...................................... 276Cargo compartment floor

Opening/closing ............................ 281Stowage well (under) ..................... 281

Cargo netAttaching ....................................... 280Important safety information ......... 279

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 277Car wash (care) ................................. 306CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 226Center console

Lower section .................................. 37Upper section .................................. 36

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 232Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

Changing bulbsCornering light function ................. 121High-beam headlamps ................... 120Low-beam headlamps .................... 120Parking lamps ................................ 120Reversing lamps ............................ 122Standing lamps (front) ................... 120Turn signals (front) ......................... 121

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 66Rear doors ....................................... 66

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 61Restraint systems ............................ 61Special seat belt retractor ............... 64

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 64Top Tether ....................................... 65

Cigarette lighter ................................ 284Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 309Trailer tow hitch ............................. 310

Climate controlAdjusting the airflow (AIR FLOW) ... 135Automatic climate control (3-zone) 132Controlling automatically ............... 135Cooling with air dehumidification . . 133Defrosting the windows ................. 138Defrosting the windshield .............. 137Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 129Important safety notes .................. 128Indicator lamp ................................ 135

6 Index

Maximum cooling .......................... 138Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 133Notes on using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 130Overview of systems ...................... 128Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 135Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 139Rear control panel ......................... 132Refrigerant ..................................... 374Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 374Setting the air distribution ............. 136Setting the airflow ......................... 137Setting the air vents ...................... 140Setting the temperature ................ 136Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 139Switching on/off ........................... 133Switching residual heat on/off ...... 139Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 138Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 137

Coat hooks ......................................... 280Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 362see Emergency spare wheel

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 114Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 223Convenience closing feature .............. 90Convenience opening feature ............ 90Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 304Display message ............................ 247Filling capacity ............................... 373Important safety notes .................. 372Temperature gauge ........................ 220Warning lamp ................................. 269

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 29Cornering light function

Changing bulbs .............................. 121Display message ............................ 243Function/notes ............................. 116

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 119Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 174Deactivating ................................... 175Display message ............................ 255Driving system ............................... 173Function/notes ............................. 173Important safety notes .................. 173Setting a speed .............................. 175Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 174

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 282Important safety notes .................. 282Rear compartment ......................... 282

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 27Customer Relations Department ....... 27

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 246Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231Switching on/off (switch) .............. 113

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 26DEF

Adding ........................................... 162Display message ............................ 250Filling capacity ............................... 371Important safety notes .................. 370

Index 7

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231Interior lighting .............................. 232

Diagnostics connection ...................... 26Diesel .................................................. 370Digital speedometer ......................... 224DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmissionDisplay (cleaning instructions) ........ 310Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 300Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 235Driving systems ............................. 251Engine ............................................ 247General notes ................................ 235Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 235KEYLESS-GO .................................. 260Lights ............................................. 243Safety systems .............................. 236SmartKey ....................................... 260Tires ............................................... 256Vehicle ........................................... 258

Distance recorder ............................. 223see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 271DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions ..................... 177Deactivating ................................... 181Display message ............................ 254Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 180Driving tips .................................... 182Function/notes ............................. 175Important safety notes .................. 175Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 180Warning lamp ................................. 271

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 232Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 76Control panel ................................... 39Display message ............................ 259Emergency locking ........................... 83

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Important safety notes .................... 81Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 166Drinks holder

see Cup holderDrive program

Automatic ...................................... 156Display ........................................... 153Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 153Manual ........................................... 156

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 301Symmetrical low beam .................. 112

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 173

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 67BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 68Electronic brake force distribution ... 72ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .................................... 69, 70ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 70Important safety information ........... 67Overview .......................................... 67PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 197Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 206Active Driving Assistance package 206Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 209Active Parking Assist ..................... 188ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 201Blind Spot Assist ............................ 202Cruise control ................................ 173Display message ............................ 251DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175HOLD function ............................... 183

8 Index

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 204Lane Tracking package .................. 202PARKTRONIC ................................. 185Rear view camera .......................... 192

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 155Brakes ........................................... 168Break-in period .............................. 144DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182Downhill gradient ........................... 168Drinking and driving ....................... 166Driving abroad ............................... 112Driving in winter ............................. 170Driving on flooded roads ................ 170Driving on sand .............................. 172Driving on wet roads ...................... 170Driving over obstacles ................... 172Exhaust check ............................... 166Fuel ................................................ 166General .......................................... 166Hydroplaning ................................. 170Icy road surfaces ........................... 171Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 168Off-road driving .............................. 172Off-road fording ............................. 170Snow chains .................................. 333Symmetrical low beam .................. 112Tire ruts ......................................... 172Towing a trailer .............................. 212Traveling uphill ............................... 173Wet road surface ........................... 168

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 226DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 227

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 233Function/notes ............................. 105

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 106Function/notes ............................. 105Switching on/off ........................... 233

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 237Function/notes ................................ 72

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 167On-board computer ....................... 224

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 149Automatic engine switch-off .......... 149Deactivating/activating ................. 150General information ....................... 148Important safety notes .................. 148Introduction ................................... 148

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 83Vehicle ............................................. 83

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 362Important safety notes .................. 361Storage location ............................ 362Stowing .......................................... 363Technical data ............................... 364

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 60Safety guidelines ............................. 43

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 88

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 23

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 268Display message ............................ 247ECO start/stop function ................ 148Engine number ............................... 367Irregular running ............................ 151Jump-starting ................................. 320Starting problems .......................... 151Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 147Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 147Switching off .................................. 164Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 325

Engine, jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 151

Index 9

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 303Additives ........................................ 372Checking the oil level ..................... 302Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 303Display message ............................ 249Filling capacity ............................... 372Notes about oil grades ................... 371Notes on oil level/consumption .... 302Viscosity ........................................ 372

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

Deactivating/activating ................... 70Display message ............................ 236ETS/4ETS ........................................ 70Function/notes ......................... 69, 70Important safety information ........... 70Trailer stabilization ........................... 71Warning lamp ................................. 265

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 70Exhaust check ................................... 166Exhaust tail pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 310Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 112see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 106Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 234Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107Setting ........................................... 107Storing settings (memory function) 109Storing the parking position .......... 108

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 314

Flat tireMOExtended run-flat system ......... 315Preparing the vehicle ..................... 314see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 298Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 113Folding the rear bench seatforwards/back .................................. 276Fording

Off-road ......................................... 170On flooded roads ........................... 170

Front fog lampsDisplay message ............................ 245Switching on/off ........................... 113

FuelAdditives ........................................ 369Consumption statistics .................. 223Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 224Displaying the range ...................... 224Driving tips .................................... 166Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Grade (gasoline) ............................ 369Important safety notes .................. 368Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 369Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Quality (diesel) ............................... 370Refueling ........................................ 158Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 368

Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 159

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 250Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 224

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 368Problem (malfunction) ................... 161

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 314Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 325Before changing ............................. 325Dashboard fuse box ....................... 325Fuse box in the cargocompartment ................................. 326

10 Index

Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 326Important safety notes .................. 325

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 298Important safety notes .................. 295Opening/closing the garage door .. 297Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 296

Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 311Genuine parts ...................................... 22Glove box ........................................... 275GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ......................................... 352

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 115Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 305Cleaning system (function) ............ 115Cleaning system (notes) ................ 373Fogging up ..................................... 117see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 101Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101Adjusting (rear) .............................. 102Installing/removing (rear) .............. 102see NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 120Display message ............................ 245Switching on/off ........................... 115

Hill start assist .................................. 148

HOLD functionDeactivating ................................... 184Display message ............................ 251Function/notes ............................. 183

HoodClosing ........................................... 302Display message ............................ 259Important safety notes .................. 301Opening ......................................... 302

Hydroplaning ..................................... 170

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 73Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 33Settings ......................................... 230Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 231Interior lighting ................................. 118

Automatic control .......................... 118Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 232Emergency lighting ........................ 119Manual control ............................... 118Overview ........................................ 118Reading lamp ................................. 118Setting the brightness of thedisplay/switch (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231

JJack

Storage location ............................ 314Using ............................................. 356

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 320

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 91Display message ............................ 260Locking ............................................ 77Start/Stop button .......................... 145

Index 11

Starting the engine ........................ 147Unlocking ......................................... 77

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 145SmartKey ....................................... 145

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 155

Knee bag .............................................. 46

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 229Display message ............................ 252Function/information .................... 204

Lane Tracking package ..................... 202LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 64License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 245Light function, active

Display message ............................ 246Lighting

Light switch ................................... 112Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 232Active light function ....................... 115Automatic headlamp mode ............ 113Cornering light function ................. 116Display message ............................ 243Driving abroad ............................... 112Fog lamps ...................................... 113Hazard warning lamps ................... 115High beam flasher .......................... 115High-beam headlamps ................... 115Low-beam headlamps .................... 113Parking lamps ................................ 114Rear fog lamp ................................ 114Setting the brightness of thedisplay/switch (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231Standing lamps .............................. 114Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 231

Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) 231Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 113Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 231Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 231Turn signals ................................... 114see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 246Loading guidelines ............................ 274Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 82Emergency locking ........................... 83From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 82

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 233Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 120Display message ............................ 243Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 113

Lumbar supportAdjusting ....................................... 102Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport .......................................... 103

MM+S tires ............................................ 332Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instructions) 308mbrace

Call priority .................................... 291Display message ............................ 238Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 291Downloading routes ....................... 294

12 Index

Emergency call .............................. 288General notes ................................ 287Geo fencing ................................... 295Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293MB info call button ........................ 290Remote vehicle locking .................. 292Roadside Assistance button .......... 290Search & Send ............................... 292Self-test ......................................... 288Speed alert .................................... 294System .......................................... 288Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 293Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 78Locking vehicle ................................ 83Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83

Memory card (audio) ......................... 226Memory function ............................... 109Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 235Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 227

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 77MOExtended run-flat system ........... 315Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 358Mounting a new wheel ................... 357Preparing the vehicle ..................... 355Raising the vehicle ......................... 356Removing a wheel .......................... 357Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 355

MP3Operation ....................................... 226see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 222Permanent display ......................... 231

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 221Overview .......................................... 35

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 225see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 54Resetting after being triggered ........ 55

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsOperation ......................................... 54Resetting after being triggered ........ 55

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 144

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 52

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 61System overview .............................. 42

OCSFaults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 52

Odometer ........................................... 223Off-road driving

Approach/departure angle ............ 376Checklist after driving off-road ...... 172Checklist before driving off-road .... 172Fording depth ................................ 375General information ....................... 172Important safety notes .................. 171Maximum gradient climbing ability 376Traveling uphill ............................... 173

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAssistance menu ........................... 228Audio menu ................................... 226Convenience submenu .................. 233Displaying a service message ........ 300

Index 13

Display messages .......................... 235Factory settings submenu ............. 234Important safety notes .................. 220Instrument cluster submenu .......... 230Lighting submenu .......................... 231Menu overview .............................. 223Message memory .......................... 235Navigation menu ............................ 225Operation ....................................... 221Service menu ................................. 230Settings menu ............................... 230Standard display ............................ 223Telephone menu ............................ 227Trip menu ...................................... 223Vehicle submenu ........................... 232Video DVD operation ..................... 227

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 121Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 221Overhead control panel ...................... 38Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 66

PPaint code number ............................ 366Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 307Panic alarm .......................................... 42Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing .............................. 93Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 94Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95Resetting ......................................... 94

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 92

Parking ............................................... 164Important safety notes .................. 164Parking brake ................................ 165

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 108Rear view camera .......................... 192see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 188see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 237Notes/function .............................. 165

Parking lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 120Switching on/off ........................... 114

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 187Driving system ............................... 185Function/notes ............................. 185Important safety notes .................. 185Problem (malfunction) ................... 188Range of the sensors ..................... 185Trailer towing ................................. 187Warning display ............................. 186

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblem (malfunction) ..................... 53Problems (malfunction) .................. 242

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 49Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 310Power washers .................................. 307Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 238Operation ......................................... 54

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 229Display message ............................ 239Function/notes ................................ 72Warning lamp ................................. 271

Program selector button .................. 155Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 22Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 147

14 Index

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 27

RRadar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 233Display message ............................ 251

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 226see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Reading lamp ..................................... 118Rear compartment

Setting the airflow ......................... 137Setting the air vents ...................... 141

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 245Switching on/off ........................... 114

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 309Function/notes ............................. 192Switching on/off ........................... 193

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 106Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 139Switching on/off ........................... 138

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 124Switching on/off ........................... 123

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem)

Important safety notes .................. 374Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Important safety notes .................. 158Refueling process .......................... 159see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 295Programming (garage door opener) 296

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 119Overview of bulb types .................. 119

Reporting safety defects .................... 27Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 249Warning lamp ................................. 268see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 139Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 93Roller sunblinds ............................... 94Side windows ................................... 89Tailgate ............................................ 84

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 24Roller blind

see Roller sunblindRoller sunblind

Opening/closing .............................. 94Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 93

Roof carrier ........................................ 281Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 312Roof load (maximum) ........................ 375Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 225

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 61Child restraint systems .................... 61Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 49Overview of occupant safetysystems ........................................... 42

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Index 15

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 58Adjusting the height ......................... 58Belt force limiters ............................ 60center rear-compartment seat ......... 59Cleaning ......................................... 312Correct usage .................................. 56Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 60Fastening ......................................... 58Important safety guidelines ............. 56Releasing ......................................... 59Safety guidelines ............................. 43Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 233Warning lamp ................................. 261Warning lamp (function) ................... 59

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 100Adjusting lumbar support .............. 102Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport .......................................... 103Adjusting the head restraint .......... 101Cleaning the cover ......................... 311Correct driver's seat position ........... 98Folding the backrest (rearcompartment) forwards/back ....... 276Folding the rear bench seatforwards/back ............................... 276Important safety notes .................... 99Seat heating problem .................... 104Storing settings (memory function) 109Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 309Service menu (on-board computer) . 230Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 372Coolant (engine) ............................ 372DEF special additives ..................... 370Engine oil ....................................... 371Fuel ................................................ 367Important safety notes .................. 367Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 374Washer fluid ................................... 373

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 234On-board computer ....................... 230

Setting the air distribution ............... 136Setting the airflow ............................ 137Side impact air bag ............................. 47Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 245Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 308Convenience closing feature ............ 90Convenience opening feature .......... 90Important safety information ........... 88Opening/closing .............................. 89Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 91

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 79Changing the programming ............. 77Checking the battery ....................... 79Convenience closing feature ............ 90Convenience opening feature .......... 90Display message ............................ 260Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76Important safety notes .................... 76Loss ................................................. 80Mechanical key ................................ 78Positions (ignition lock) ................. 145Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80Starting the engine ........................ 147

Snow chains ...................................... 333Sockets

Center console .............................. 284General notes ................................ 284Rear compartment ......................... 285

Spare wheelStorage location ............................ 362Stowing .......................................... 363

Specialist workshop ............................ 27Special seat belt retractor .................. 64Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 224In the Instrument cluster ................. 33Segments ...................................... 221Selecting the unit of measurement 230see Instrument cluster

16 Index

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 239Introduction ..................................... 43Warning lamp ................................. 267Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 120Display message ............................ 245Switching on/off ........................... 114

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 146Steering (display message) .............. 259Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 221Cleaning ......................................... 311Important safety notes .................. 104Paddle shifters ............................... 156Storing settings (memory function) 109

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 156Stowage areas ................................... 275Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 275Cup holders ................................... 282Glove box ....................................... 275Important safety information ......... 275Rear ............................................... 276Stowage net ................................... 276

Stowage net ....................................... 276Summer opening

see Convenience opening featureSummer tires ..................................... 332Sun visor ............................................ 282Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 231SUV

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 25Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 139Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 74

TTachometer ........................................ 220Tailgate

Display message ............................ 258Emergency unlocking ....................... 88Important safety notes .................... 84Limiting the opening angle ............... 87Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 87Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 85Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85Opening dimensions ...................... 375

Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 244

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 33

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 367Emergency spare wheel ................. 364Information .................................... 366Tires/wheels ................................. 359Trailer loads ................................... 376Vehicle data ................................... 375

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 291Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 291Downloading routes ....................... 294Emergency call .............................. 288Geo fencing ................................... 295Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293MB info call button ........................ 290Remote vehicle locking .................. 292Roadside Assistance button .......... 290Search & Send ............................... 292Self-test ......................................... 288Speed alert .................................... 294System .......................................... 288Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 293Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292

Tele AidGeneral notes ................................ 287

Index 17

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 227Display message ............................ 259Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227Number from the phone book ........ 228Redialing ........................................ 228Rejecting/ending a call ................. 227

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 220Outside temperature ...................... 221Setting (climate control) ................ 136

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74Immobilizer ...................................... 73

Timesee separate operating instructions

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 338Checking manually ........................ 337Display message ............................ 256Important safety notes .................. 338Maximum ....................................... 336Notes ............................................. 335Pressure loss warning .................... 337Recommended ............................... 334

Tire pressure loss warningsystem

General notes ................................ 337Important safety notes .................. 337Restarting ...................................... 338

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 340Function/notes ............................. 338General notes ................................ 338Important safety notes .................. 339Restarting ...................................... 341Warning lamp ................................. 272Warning message .......................... 341

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 353Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 351Bar (definition) ............................... 351Changing a wheel .......................... 354Characteristics .............................. 351Checking ........................................ 331Definition of terms ......................... 351

Direction of rotation ...................... 354Display message ............................ 256Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 354DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 350DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 351GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 352GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ..................................... 352GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 352GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 352Important safety notes .................. 330Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 351Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 352Labeling (overview) ........................ 347Load bearing index (definition) ...... 353Load index ..................................... 350Load index (definition) ................... 352M+S tires ....................................... 332Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 352Maximum load on a tire (definition) 353Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 352Maximum tire load ......................... 345Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 352MOExtended tires .......................... 315Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 353PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 353Replacing ....................................... 354Service life ..................................... 332Sidewall (definition) ....................... 353Speed rating (definition) ................ 352Storing ........................................... 355Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 351Summer tires ................................. 332Temperature .................................. 347TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 353

18 Index

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 353Tire pressure (definition) ................ 353Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 351Tire size (data) ............................... 359Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 348Tire tread ....................................... 331Tire tread (definition) ..................... 353Total load limit (definition) ............. 354Traction ......................................... 346Traction (definition) ....................... 353Tread wear ..................................... 346TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 353Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 346Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 351Unladen weight (definition) ............ 352Wear indicator (definition) ............. 354Wheel rim (definition) .................... 351see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 65Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 322Installing the towing eye ................ 323Removing the towing eye ............... 323With the rear axle raised ................ 324

Towing a trailerActive Parking Assist ..................... 192Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 310Coupling up a trailer ...................... 214Decoupling a trailer ....................... 216Driving tips .................................... 212Important safety notes .................. 212Installing the ball coupling ............. 214Lights display message .................. 243Mounting dimensions .................... 376Power supply ................................. 217Removing the ball coupling ............ 216Storing the ball coupling ................ 217Trailer loads ................................... 376

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 324

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 325Important safety notes .................. 322

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbarnoseweights ...................................... 216Trailer towing

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 209Active Lane Keeping Assist .... 206, 212Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204PARKTRONIC ................................. 187Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 216

Transfer case ..................................... 158Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 153Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 153Transporting the vehicle .................. 324Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 173Driving downhill ............................. 173Maximum gradient-climbingcapability ....................................... 173

Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 311Trip computer (on-board computer) 223Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 223Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 224

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 121Display message ............................ 244Switching on/off ........................... 114

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)(definition) ......................................... 353Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 82

Index 19

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 283Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 258Emergency locking ........................... 83Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Equipment ....................................... 23Individual settings .......................... 230Limited Warranty ............................. 28Loading .......................................... 342Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76Lowering ........................................ 358Maintenance .................................... 24Parking for a long period ................ 165Pulling away ................................... 147Raising ........................................... 356Reporting problems ......................... 27Securing from rolling away ............ 355Towing away .................................. 322Transporting .................................. 324Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76Vehicle data ................................... 375

Vehicle data ....................................... 375Vehicle data (off-road driving)

Approach/departure angle ............ 376Fording depth ................................ 375Maximum gradient climbing ability 376

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 375Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 366Vehicle tool kit .................................. 314Video (DVD) ........................................ 227VIN ...................................................... 366

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 263Brakes ........................................... 263Check Engine ................................. 268Coolant .......................................... 269

Distance warning ........................... 271DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 271ESP® .............................................. 265ESP® OFF ....................................... 266Fuel tank ........................................ 268Overview .......................................... 34PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 49Reserve fuel ................................... 268Seat belt ........................................ 261SRS ................................................ 267Tire pressure monitor .................... 272

Warranty ............................................ 366Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 259Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 358Wheel chock ...................................... 355Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 354Checking ........................................ 331Cleaning ......................................... 307Cleaning (warning) ......................... 355Emergency spare wheel ................. 361Important safety notes .................. 330Interchanging/changing ................ 354Mounting a new wheel ................... 357Mounting a wheel .......................... 355Removing a wheel .......................... 357Storing ........................................... 355Tightening torque ........................... 358Wheel size/tire size ....................... 359

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 240Operation ......................................... 48

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 137

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system .............. 305Notes ............................................. 373

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 126Rear window wiper ........................ 123Replacing the wiper blades ............ 123Switching on/off ........................... 122

20 Index

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 332Slippery road surfaces ................... 171Snow chains .................................. 333

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 332

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 308Important safety notes .................. 123Replacing (rear window) ................ 124Replacing (windshield) ................... 124

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 311Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 137

Index 21

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one ofcomprehensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems,may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.

22 Introduction

Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 366) when orderinggenuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Bear in mind that your vehicle maynot feature all functions described here. Thisalso applies to safety-relevant systems andfunctions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Introduction 23

Z

Information for customers inCaliforniaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.

24 Introduction

If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event of

an abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other

Introduction 25

Z

networked components. In particular,systems relevant to safety could also beaffected. As a result, these may no longerfunction as intended and/or jeopardize theoperating safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.a curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis.

In situations like this, the body, theundercarriage, chassis parts, wheels ortires could be damaged without thedamage being visible. Componentsdamaged in this way can unexpectedly failor, in the case of an accident, no longerwithstand the strain they are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system for anextended period, they can catch fire.Have the vehicle checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. If on continuing your journeyyou notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and trafficconditions. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to adiagnostics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

26 Introduction

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions testduring the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information whendriving your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

Introduction 27

Z

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equippedwithdevices that can record vehicle systems data.If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in theevent of an accident.

This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access these data and submitthem:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or itssales and service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as during air bag deploymentor when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR datais recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,

28 Introduction

other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonal identification data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, who have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 29

Z

30

Dashboard ........................................... 32Instrument cluster .............................. 33Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35Center console .................................... 36Overhead control panel ...................... 38Door control panel .............................. 39

31

Ataglance

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 156

; Combination switch 114

= Instrument cluster 33

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 185

B Overhead control panel 38

C Operating the climatecontrol systems 128

D Ignition lock 145Start/Stop button 145

Function PageE Adjusting the steering

wheel manually 104

F Adjusting the steeringwheel electrically 104

G Cruise control lever 174

H Parking brake 165

I Diagnostics connection 26

J Opening the hood 302

K Releasing the parking brake 165

L Light switch 112

32 DashboardAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Fuel gauge

; Coolant temperature 220

= Speedometer withsegments 221

Function Page? Multifunction display 222

A Tachometer 220

i Adjust the instrument cluster lightingusing the on-board computer(Y page 231).

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: ÷ ESP® 265

; · Distance warning 271

= å ESP® OFF 265

? $ Brakes (USA only) 263

A J Brakes (Canada only) 263

B #! Turn signals 114

C ! ABS 263

D 6 SRS 267

E ; Check Engine 268

F h Tire pressure monitor 272

G ü Seat belt 261

Function PageH % Diesel engine:

preglow 147

I ? Coolant 269

J K High-beamheadlamps 115

K L Low-beamheadlamps 113

L T Parking lamps 114

M R Rear fog lamp 114

N N Front fog lamps 113

O 8 Reserve fuel 268

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 222

; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 227Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 2219:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 221a

Confirms your selection 221Hides display messages 235

B %

Back 221Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: £ Hazard warning

lamps 115

; ATA indicator lamp 74

= 45 Indicator lamp 49

? å ESP® 70

A COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions

Function PageB c Seat heating 103

C ¤ ECO start/stopfunction 148

D c PARKTRONIC 185

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page: Stowage compartment 275

Ashtray 283Cigarette lighter 284Socket 284

; Cup holder 282

Function Page= Stowage compartment 275

? Audio/COMANDcontroller; see the separateoperating instructions

Center console 37

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear-

compartment interiorlighting on/off 118

; | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 118

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 118

? 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 93

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 290

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 288

Function PageC Rear-view mirror 106

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 297

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System1

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 290

G p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 118

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 118

1 The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operatinginstructions.

38 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 81

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 82

= Adjusts the seatselectrically 100

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel 109

A Z Selects the leftexterior mirror 106

B ö Folds the exteriormirrors in/out 107

C \ Selects the rightexterior mirror 106

Function PageD 7 Adjusts the exterior

mirrors 106

E W Opens/closes thefront side windows 89

F W Opens/closes therear side windows 89

G n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 66

H q Opens/closes thetailgate 87

Door control panel 39

Ataglance

40

Useful information .............................. 42Panic alarm .......................................... 42Occupant safety .................................. 42Children in the vehicle ........................ 61Driving safety systems ....................... 67Theft deterrent locking system ......... 73

41

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: forapproximately one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

Occupant safety

Overview of occupant safetyIn this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraintsRair bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

The different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61).

42 Occupant safetySafety

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS consists of:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning DevicesRBelt force limitersSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, child restraintsystem components may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS warning lampgoes out while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be madeto any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any componentor part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bag

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangersfrom the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have thedeployed air bags replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, windowcurtain air bags and pelvis air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

44 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the side

impact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

The air bag installation locations areidentified by the AIR BAG symbol.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passenger will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bagsThe front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

The release time of the front air bags isdependent upon the use of the seat belt.If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed. If the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.

The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of front-passenger front airbag; is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 49).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will only bedeployed if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weightsensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp on the center console is not lit(Y page 49)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high-impact severity

Driver's knee bag

46 Occupant safetySafety

Driver's knee bag: increases the driver'sprotection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuriesDriver's knee bag: deploys under thesteering column. If, during a frontal collision,the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt, driver's kneebag: is deployed along with the driver's airbag. Driver's knee bag: operates best inconjunction with correctly positioned andfastened seat belts.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work notperformed correctly to the doors or doorpaneling, as well as damaged doors, can leadto the function of the sensors being impaired.The air bags might therefore not functionproperly anymore. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or doorpaneling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploycorrectly and therefore cannot provide theintended protection in the event of anaccident.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Side impact air bags: deploy next to theouter seat cushions.Side impact air bags: are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags:will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehiclemodel. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the levelof protection of the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.

Pelvis air bags: deploy next to and belowthe outer seat cushions. They are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags aregenerally not deployed. Exception: if thesystem detects high vehicle deceleration oracceleration in a lateral direction anddetermines that deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Pelvis air bags: will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sideis not deployed in the following situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidewill deploy if the front-passenger seat belt isfastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bagsThewindow curtain air bags enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Window curtain air bags: are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRindependently of the use of the seat beltRif the vehicle rolls over and the systemdetermines that window curtain air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags: will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant ClassificationSystem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivatedautomatically for certain weight categories.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the current status. If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp islit, the passenger air bag is disabled.

The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger ispositioned correctly. Observe also the air bagdisplaymessages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 242).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front-passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag deployment when the OCS has classifiedthe front-passenger seat occupant asweighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraintor if the front-passenger seat is classified asbeing empty.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then, depending on occupantweight sensor readings from the front-passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.With the 45 indicator lampilluminated, the front-passenger front air bagis deactivated. With the 45 indicatorlamp out, the front-passenger front air bag isactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately 6 seconds whenthe engine is started and then go out,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.

If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front-passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deploymentthresholdRindependently of the side impact air bagsIf the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced by:Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration asassessed by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asidentified by OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate the

50 Occupant safetySafety

front-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, donot transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.

RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of atypical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should notposition him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in thischapter.

System self-testThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up if you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lockRpress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop buttononce or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

When an adult is sitting correctly on the front-passenger seat and is categorized by the OCSsystem as an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up and goes offagain after approximately six seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSsystem classifies the front-passenger seat asbeing empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will continue to light up andnot go out.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 53).

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect thefunction of the OCS. This could result in thefront-passenger front air bag not functioningas intended during an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Makesure that the bottom and back of the childrestraint system make full contact with thefront-passenger seat cushion and backrest.Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

52 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, uprightposition.

X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 242).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with aweight up to that of atypical twelve-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraintsystem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. Ifnecessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat beltbeing pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off, havethe OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 242).

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

G WARNINGThe PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact ofan accident on vehicle occupants, as long astheir seat belts have been fastened correctly.Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in theevent of an accident cannot be ruled out. Youshould therefore always drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions.

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardoussituations.PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUSRif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situationsRin critical driving situations, e.g. whenphysical limits are exceeded and thevehicle understeers or oversteers severely

If the seat belts are not released:X When the vehicle is stationary, move thebackrest or seat back slightly.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you adjust the seat.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

More information about seat belt adjustment,a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat beltadjustment" section (Y page 58).

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraintcovers.

NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints increase protection of thedriver's and front-passenger's head andneck. In the event of a rear collision of acertain severity, the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and the front-passenger seatsare moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats(Y page 55). Otherwise, the additional

54 Occupant safetySafety

protection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsthat have been triggered are moved forwardsand can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop after a rear-end collision.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFor reasons of safety, have the NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center after a rear-endcollision.

G WARNINGWhen pushing back the NECK-PRO headrestraint cushion, make sure your fingers donot become caught between the headrestraint cushion and the cover. Failure toobserve this could result in injuries.

NECK-PRO head restraintsi Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you havedifficulty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow; as far asit will go.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow=until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsi If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide;between the NECK-PRO luxury head

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

restraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deploymentmechanism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint cushion back= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or thebelt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accidentmay not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts can tear orfail, for example in the event of an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices maybe deployed unintentionally or fail to bedeployed when required. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify seat belts, EmergencyTensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages andinertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are notdamaged or worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, as

56 Occupant safetySafety

that could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for the side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, window curtain airbags, and ETDs) impacts which exceedpreset deployment thresholds and incertain rollovers (window curtain air bagsand ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,

such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 98).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 58).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. For further information on specialseat belt retractors, see (Y page 64).Formore information about releasing the seatbelt with release button?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 59).

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the beltbuckle and you then turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply aretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the occupant and the seat belt. Donot hold on to the seat belt tightly while it isadjusting. You can switch the seat-beltadjustment on and off in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 233).The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be foundin the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)" section (Y page 54).

Belt height adjustmentYou can adjust the seat belt height on thedriver's seat and the front-passenger seat.

58 Occupant safetySafety

Adjust the height so that the upper part of theseat belt is routed across the center of yourshoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease:.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release: andmake sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Using the rear center seat beltIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is foldeddown and back up again, the rear center seatbelt may lock. The seat belt can then not bepulled out.X To release the rear center seat belt: pullthe seat belt out approximately 1 in(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrestand then release it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts

X Press release button? on belt buckle=.X Guide belt tongue; to belt sashguide:.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver andthe front passenger have already fastenedtheir seat belts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up:Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seatbelt is fastenedRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, a warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or front-passenger seat belt has been fastened.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.

orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 261).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longeroperational and are unable to perform theirintended protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Therefore, have pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices which have beentriggered immediately replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: EmergencyTensioning Devices that are triggered by anelectric motor can be deployed as often asdesired and do not need to be replaced.

The seat belts for the front seats and rearouter seats are equipped with ETDs and seatbelt force limiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp "(Y page 43)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the lap-shoulder belts in the frontRthe front-passenger seat is occupied andthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The Emergency Tensioning Devices aretriggered depending on the type and severityof an accident, if:Rin certain situations where the vehicle rollsover and the system determines that it canprovide additional protectionRin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision, the vehicle decelerates or

60 Occupant safetySafety

accelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRin the event of a side impact, the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction on the side opposite theimpact

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which take on a part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on theoccupant being distributed over a greaterarea.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territories

Rthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe all warning signs in the vehicleinterior and on the infant or child restraint.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infant

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing childrestraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out or

remains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannotprotect as intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions and the notes on use. Pleaseensure, that the base of the child restraintsystem is always resting completely on theseat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.cushions, under or behind the child restraintsystem. Only use child restraint systems withthe original cover designed for them. Onlyreplace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly or is not secured, it can comeloose in the event of an accident, heavybraking or a sudden change in direction. Thechild restraint system could be thrown about,striking vehicle occupants. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systemsproperly, even if they are not being used.Make sure that you observe the child restraint

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securingsystems which have been damaged orsubjected to a load in an accident can nolonger protect as intended. The child cannotthen be restrained in the event of an accident,heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have thesecuring systems on the child restraintsystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, before you install a child restraintsystem again.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot.Childrenmay burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight.Protect it with a blanket, for example. If thechild restraint system has been exposed todirect sunlight, let it cool down beforesecuring the child in it. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Special seat belt retractorAll seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

G WARNINGNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is inmotion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.Install the child restraint system inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.Attach the child restraint system to bothsecuring rings.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident andseriously or even fatally injure the child.Child restraint systems or child seat securingrings that are malfunctioning or damaged asthe result of a collision must be replaced.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. Securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright of the rear seats.Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems using the vehicle's seat beltsystem. When installing child restraintsystems, you must observe themanufacturer's installation instructions.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

Installation instructions: indicate theinstallation location of securing rings2.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

Top Tether

G WARNINGAlways lock the rear seat backrests in theirupright position when the rear seats areoccupied by passengers. Lock the rear seatbackrests in their upright position beforeinstalling the Top Tether straps or when thecargo compartment is not in use. Make surethat rear seat backrests are secured properlyby pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.If the seat backrest is not locked properly, theseat backrest could fold forward. The childrestraint system is no longer supportedproperly or held in position and can no longerfulfill its function. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.The Top Tether anchorages are located on therear side of the rear seat backrests.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Guide Top Tether beltA downwardsbetween cargo compartment cover; andrear seat backrest.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether beltA into Top Tether anchorage=.Make sure that:RTop Tether hook? is hooked into TopTether anchorage= as shown.RTop Tether beltA is not twisted.RTop Tether beltA is routed between therear seat backrest and cargo

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

compartment cover; if cargocompartment cover; is installed.RTop Tether beltA is routed between therear seat backrest and the cargo net ifthe cargo net is installed.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 102). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

66 Children in the vehicleSafety

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp: is off,operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)RPRE-SAFE® Brake

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road, weather and traffic

conditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay specialattention to the notes on tires,recommended minimum tire tread depths,etc. (Y page 330).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the information

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 263) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 236).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even if you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS)

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehiclesequipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensorsystem must be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the riskof a collision with a vehicle or reduce theeffects of such a collision. If BAS PLUSdetects a danger of collision, you are assistedwhen braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the lastpossible moment.

When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to thetraffic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance inhazardous situations with vehicles in frontwithin a speed range between 4 mph(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react tostationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakesfunction as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer a risk of collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. In addition, more drive torque istransferred to the wheel or wheels withtraction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes byESP® may otherwise destroy the brakesystem.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the noteson ESP®(Y page 324) when towing thevehicle with a raised rear axle.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. Before youoperate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damagethe drive train or the brake system.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 265) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 236).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. Example: if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine was switchedoff, ESP® remains deactivated when theengine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

You can select between the followingstatuses of ESP:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To switch off: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch on: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

ESP® trailer stabilization

G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination fromswerving. Trailers with a high center of gravitycan tip over before ESP® can detect this.There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.In this situation, ESP® assists you and candetect if the vehicle/trailer combinationbegins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle downby braking and limiting the engine output untilthe vehicle/trailer combination hasstabilized.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 40 mph (65 km/h).Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® isdeactivated because of a malfunction.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 263) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 237).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collisionwith a vehicle ahead, andreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,you will be warned visually and acoustically

as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake yourvehicle by a partial application of the brakesif a danger of collision is detected. There maybe a collision unless you also brake.Automatic emergency braking cannot preventa collision. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficconditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 229).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph(7 km/h), this function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe· distance warning lamp will light upin the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastened

andRthe vehicle speed is betweenapproximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application.Automatic emergency braking is notperformed until immediately prior to animminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

Theft deterrent locking system 73

Safety

Z

X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe tailgateRthe hoodThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies theCustomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends themessage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceservice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on thedashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

74 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Useful information .............................. 76SmartKey ............................................. 76Doors .................................................... 81Cargo compartment ............................ 84Side windows ...................................... 88Sliding sunroof .................................... 92

75

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky key ringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

SmartKey functionsThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flap

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicle

The turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 231).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 233).X To unlock centrally: press the%button.

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armedagain.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be startedby any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine the

functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicleby using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lockit using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the key and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).KEYLESS-GO checks whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle by periodicallyestablishing a radio connection between thevehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for anextended period.

Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 91).If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, onlythe cargo compartment of the vehicle isunlocked.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's door

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if youfrequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 79) flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 77).

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 74).X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey intothe ignition lock.i With KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lockbeforehand.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.If battery check lamp: does not light upbriefly during the test, the battery isdischarged.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

X Change the battery (Y page 79).

i You can get a battery at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 78).

X Pressmechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow untilbattery compartment cover: opens. Donot hold battery compartment cover:closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of batterycompartment cover: into the housingfirst and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 79).

X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO is in standbymode because the vehicle has not beenunlocked for a long time.X Pull the door handle and then turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% or& button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% or& button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 79).

X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 316).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 320).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 274).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if they

Doors 81

Openingandclosing

Z

are not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 66).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening adoor from the inside will trigger the anti-theftalarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 74).

X To unlock a front door: pull doorhandle;.Locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull doorhandle;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 74).If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is notunlocked when the release button for thecentral locking is used.

Automatic locking featureThe vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are turning at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h).

82 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 232).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 74).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 78).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 82).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 78).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 83

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make sure

that there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 375).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 274).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. You could otherwise lockyourself out.Vehicles without the EASY-PACKtailgate: the tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from inside with the mechanicalkey

For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgateyou can:Ropen and close the tailgate manually fromoutsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom insideRlimit the opening angle of the tailgateRunlock the tailgate from inside with themechanical key

Tailgate reversing featureThe tailgate is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the tailgate during theclosing procedure. The tailgate opens againautomatically. The automatic reversingfeature is however only an aid and is not asubstitute for your attentiveness whenclosing the cargo compartment.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

84 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver’s door, orRpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate, orRpull the handle on the tailgate

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle:.X Raise the tailgate.Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: ifyou pull handle: and keep it in this position,you can open the tailgate manually. If yourelease the handle, the tailgate opensautomatically.

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using recess:.X Push the tailgate closed from outside thevehicle.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle withthe& button on the SmartKey(Y page 76) or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 77).i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedduring automatic closing of the tailgate.Moreover, people, e.g. children, may bestanding in the closing area or may enter theclosing area during the closing process. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.

Cargo compartment 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 375).

OpeningYou can open the tailgate automatically withthe SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.Open or close the tailgate fully using theautomatic door function if you have stoppedthe tailgate in an intermediate position.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the tailgate opens.

orX If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handleand let it go again immediately.

i You can also close the tailgate manuallyif it is fully opened.

! If you have opened the tailgateautomatically, you should wait a momentbefore closing the tailgate manually.

Closing

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedduring automatic closing of the tailgate.Moreover, people, e.g. children, may bestanding in the closing area or may enter theclosing area during the closing process. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

You can close the tailgate automatically usingthe SmartKey, the closing button2 or thelocking button3.

Closing and locking button (example: vehicle withEASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO)X To close: press closing button: on thetailgate.

orX Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the tailgate closes.

X To close and lock simultaneously:Press locking button; on the tailgate.

2 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only.3 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only.

86 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

i The tailgate can only be opened andclosed with the SmartKey if it is not in theignition lock.If the tailgate touches an object whileclosing, the closing procedure isinterrupted and the tailgate reopens.

i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.The tailgate is not closed unless aKEYLESS-GO key is detected.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedduring automatic closing of the tailgate.Moreover, people, e.g. children, may bestanding in the closing area or may enter theclosing area during the closing process. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 375).

You can open and close the tailgate from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.

X To open: pull remote operating switch:for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.

X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press remote operating switch fortailgate: until the tailgate is closed.You hear a tone during the closingprocedure.

Limiting the opening angle of thetailgate

Important safety notesYou can limit the opening angle of thetailgate. This is possible in the top half of itsopening range, up to approximately 8 in(20 cm) before the stop.This could be useful, for example, if there isinsufficient space above the tailgate.

! Make sure there is sufficient clearance toopen the tailgate fully when setting theopening angle. The tailgate could otherwisebe damaged. Ideally, set the opening angleoutside.

Cargo compartment 87

Openingandclosing

Z

ActivatingX To open the tailgate: pull the handle onthe tailgate.

X To stop the opening procedure at thedesired position: press the closing button(Y page 85) in the tailgate or pull the handleon the outside of the tailgate again.

X To store the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until you heara short tone.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.i To open the tailgate fully, pull the handleon the outside of the tailgate again after ithas stopped automatically. This does notdelete the stored position.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button(Y page 85) in the tailgate until you heartwo short tones.

Tailgate emergency release

Important safety notes! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

If the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 375).

Opening

X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 78).

X Insert mechanical key; into the openingin paneling:.

X Turn mechanical key;90° clockwise.X Push mechanical key; in the direction ofthe arrow and open the tailgate.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83),the cargo compartment is also locked.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the sidewindow moves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the sidewindow during the opening procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release the

88 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

switch or press the switch down to open theside window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 66).

Side windows 89

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are in the desiredposition.

If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side windowand the sliding sunroof. There is a risk ofinjury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:With the SmartKey:Rrelease the& button.Rpress and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open again.

Using KEYLESS-GO:Rrelease the sensor surface on the doorhandle.Rpull the door handle immediately and holdit.

90 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

The side windows and the sliding sunroofor the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel open.

Using the SmartKeyi The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and the

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if a sidewindow can no longer be closed fully.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 89).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 89).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Side windows 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windowsProblem: a side window cannot be closedbecause it is blocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing feature is then not active.Parts of the body could be trapped in theclosing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.

If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closingprocedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

92 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

The sliding sunroof can only be operatedwhen the roller sunblinds are open.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

General notesThe roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thesliding sunroof is closed.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped between

Sliding sunroof 93

Openingandclosing

Z

the roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If an objectblocks or restricts the roller sunblind duringthe closing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRwhen closing the roller sunblind againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindsReset the sliding sunroof and the rollersunblinds if the sliding sunroof or the rollersunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the3 button to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow; untilthe sliding sunroof is open approximately4 in (10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

94 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

X Press the3 button to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow; untilthe roller sunblinds are open approximately4 in (10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblinds can be fully opened andclosed again (Y page 93).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

! If the sliding sunroof and the rollersunblinds cannot be fully opened or closedafter resetting, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroofProblem: the sunroof cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof againimmediately after it has been blocked orreset, the sliding sunroof closes withincreased or maximum force. The reversingfeature is then not active. Parts of the bodycould be trapped in the closing area in theprocess. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closedwith increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and then reopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Sliding sunroof 95

Openingandclosing

Z

96

Useful information .............................. 98Correct driver's seat position ............ 98Seats .................................................... 99Steering wheel .................................. 104Mirrors ............................................... 106Memory function .............................. 109

97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Correct driver's seat position

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 99).

X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 104).

X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 104)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 105)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 56).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 58).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors in such away that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions (Y page 106).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror

98 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

settings with the memory function(Y page 109).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seatadjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The rear-compartment head restraintscan be removed (Y page 102).For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RCargo compartment enlargement(folding down the rear bench seat)(Y page 276)

Adjusting the seatsi Vehicles without Memory function: theseats can be adjusted within three minutesof a front door being opened.

The time period starts over again if, withinthese three minutes, you:Ropen or close a front doorRinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lockor remove it from the ignition lockRswitch the ignition on or offIf the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock, the seats can be adjusted atany time.

Depending on the equipment, the seatadjustment buttons are either located on theside of the seat or on the door control panel.

: Seat cushion angle; Seat height= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment? Backrest angle

: Seat cushion angle; Seat height= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment? Backrest angleA Head restraint height4

4 For vehicles with memory function only.

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 109).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 99).Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height5

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the angle of the head restraints

X Push or pull the lower edge of the headrestraint in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 100) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

5 For vehicles without memory function only.

Seats 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintangleAdjust the head restraints so that they are asclose as possible to your head.You can only adjust the two outer headrestraints.

X Pull or push the top of the head restraintuntil it is in the desired position.

Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraints

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsso as to provide optimum support for yourback.

X Move adjustment lever: in the directionof the arrow until the desired backrestcontour is achieved.

102 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheelmanually

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

104 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the steering wheelelectrically

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)The steeringwheel can also be adjustedwhenthe SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 105)RStoring settings (Y page 109)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 233).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition or

Steering wheel 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

when you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 109).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.

For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

106 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold inthe exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 234).X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 1 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 234):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors6: press and hold mirror-folding button until you hear a clickfollowed by an impact sound.(Y page 107)The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 106).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

6 Only for Canada.

Mirrors 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

108 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seator steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped,immediately release the memory functionposition button. The adjustment process isstopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exteriormirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 100).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 105) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 106).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fullyreclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest. The seat couldotherwise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory function 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

110

Useful information ............................ 112Exterior lighting ................................ 112Interior lighting ................................. 118Replacing bulbs ................................. 119Windshield wipers ............................ 122

111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Notes on driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 114)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 231)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if you

turn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps functionmustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 231).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improvevisibility as well as making it easier for otherroad users to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or together

Exterior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

with the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The green indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

114 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed.Rthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from aspeed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a halt.

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

If the vehicle returns to a speed of over6mph (10 km/h) after a full application of thebrakes, the hazard warning lamps aredeactivated automatically.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five timeswhile the lights are on andthe engine is running (Y page 122). When youswitch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Active light function

Exterior lighting 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to recognizepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedwhen the low-beam headlamps are switchedon.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignals or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering light function may remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivatedor activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

General notesYou can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once the

116 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

system no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 231).

X Turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 114).The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up if it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or otherroad users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Exterior lighting 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: u Switches the rear interior lighting

on/off; | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p Switches the right-hand front

reading lamp on/off? c Switches the front interior lighting

on/offA p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 232).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

118 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.

Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specifiedvoltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture duringoperation. Do not allow bulbs to come intocontact with liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 119). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp/parking lamp/

standing lamp: H15 55 W/15 W= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

: Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,disconnect it and pull it out of bulbholder;.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;,push it down and secure it in place.

X Attach housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

High-beam headlamps, standing/parking lamps (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb counter-clockwise and pull it out.

120 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder; andturn it clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Push the lever of holder; upwards untilholder; is released.

X Pull out bulb holder;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert holder; from above and press ituntil it engages.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Turn signal

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Grip the back of lever extension; and pullit out in a straight line.

X Take the bulb out of lever extension;.X Insert the new bulb into leverextension;.

X Re-insert lever extension; downwards(swelling) with guide rail=.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trimpanelsYou must open the side trim panel in thecargo compartment before you can changethe bulbs in the tail lamps.

Left-hand side trim panel

Replacing bulbs 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Right-hand side trim panelX To open: turn release knob: 90° in thedirection of the arrow and remove side trimpanel;.

X To close: insert side trim panel; and turnrelease knob: 90° in the oppositedirection to the arrow.

Tail lampX Switch off the lights.X Open the cargo compartment.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 121).

X Pull out connector:.X Turn fender nut; 90° counter-clockwiseand pull out the bulb holder.

X Backup lamp::: remove the bulb frombulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Re-install bulb holder.X Turn fender nut 90° clockwise.X Insert the connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 121).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

122 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low7

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high8

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if thewindshield becomes dirty in dry weatherconditions, the windshield wipers may beactivated inadvertently. This could thendamage the windshield wiper blades orscratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions. Replace the wiper blades twice ayear, ideally in spring and fall.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Turn switch: on the combination switchto the corresponding position.When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield/rear window.

7 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.8 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.

Windshield wipers 123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Moving the wiper blades to a verticalposition! Before changing the wiper blades, alwaysset the wiper arms to a vertical positionusing the combination switch. There isotherwise a risk of damaging the hood.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GOX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Set the windshield wipers toposition °.

X When the wiper arms have reached avertical position, turn the SmartKey toposition 0 and remove it from the ignitionlock.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GOX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wipers toposition °.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached avertical position, press the Start/Stopbutton.

Removing the wiper bladesX Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Remove the wiper blade from the retainingpin on the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Push the new wiper blade onto theretaining pin on the wiper arm in theopposite direction to the arrow.Make sure that the wiper blade slides fullyonto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blades

124 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm: away from the rearwindow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade; at a right angle towiper arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade;.

Installing the wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade; onto wiperarm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade; parallel to wiperarm:.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the rearwindow.

Windshield wipers 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of thewindshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialistworkshop.

126 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 128Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 128Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 133Setting the air vents ......................... 140

127

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with airdehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 139).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 90).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out mostparticles of dust and soot and completelyfilters out pollen. It also reduces gaseouspollutants and odors. A clogged filterreduces the amount of air supplied to thevehicle interior. For this reason, you shouldalways observe the interval for replacingthe filter, which is specified in theMaintenance Booklet. As it depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanstated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the dehumidificationfunction of the climate control system maybe activated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed. The vehicleis then ventilated for 30 minutes.

128 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 136); To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 136)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)D To set the air distribution (Y page 136)E To increase the airflow (Y page 137)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 137)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)

Overview of climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 136); To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 138)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 136)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)D To set the air distribution (Y page 136)E To increase the airflow (Y page 137)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 137)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)

Notes on using climate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in theá button goes out.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full

130 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

climate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 150).

Overview of climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 136); To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)= To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 139)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 136)C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)E To set the air distribution (Y page 136)F To increase the airflow (Y page 137)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 137)H To adjust airflow (Y page 135)I To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)J To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)

Rear control panelK To increase the airflow (Y page 137)L To reduce the airflow (Y page 137)M DisplayN To reduce the temperature (Y page 136)O To increase the temperature (Y page 136)

132 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Notes on using 3-zone automaticclimate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to adjust airflow (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level isrecommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment as well. The indicator lamp intheá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 150).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 135).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is only available when the engine isrunning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

and dehumidified according to thetemperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.i When the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function is activated,one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliaryheating button will light up on vehicles withauxiliary heating.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

134 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The"Cooling with airdehumidification"function cannot beswitched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

Activating/switchingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you can adjustairflow (Y page 135).

X To select manually: press the_button.

orX Press theK orI button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Adjusting airflowThis function is only available with 3-zoneautomatic climate control.In automatic mode you can select thefollowing airflow settings:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draftX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until therequired airflow setting appears in thedisplay.

Operating the climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 129).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control9

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe front: turn control: orB clockwiseor counter-clockwise (Y page 132).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the frontcontrol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.

X Turn control: clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 132).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the rearcontrol panel: press the9 or:button on the rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

i If you leave the vehicle parked for longerthan 30 minutes, the temperature settingfor the rear compartment then switchesback to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsDual-zone climate control: the air distributioncan be set individually for the driver's andfront-passenger sides.¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and side air vents as well as thefootwell air vents10

_ Directs the airflow to the entire vehicleinterior11

b Directs air through the defroster,center and side air vents11

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

9 Canada only.10 Only for USA.11 Canada only.

136 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

AdjustingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.i You can use 3-zone automatic climatecontrol to set the airflow in the rearcompartment separately.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.X To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

When the buttons for temperature, airflow orair distribution are pressed, the temperaturesetting on the driver's side is not adopted forthe other climate control zones.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

or

Operating the climate control systems 137

Climatecontrol

X Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn temperature control: orBclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 129), (Y page 132).

orX Press theK orI button.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press theÙ button again.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X Adjust the side air vents so that thewarmedair is directed to the side windows.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theO orP symbol appears in thedisplay.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

138 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.

i In the event of high pollution levels12 or athigh outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated. When air-recirculation mode isactivated automatically, the indicator lampin theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes ifcooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5†) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with automatic climatecontrol.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the temperature that has beenset.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

12 3-zone automatic climate control only.

Operating the climate control systems 139

Climatecontrol

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock (Y page 145) or remove it.

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.i If the residual heat function is activated,the windows may fog up on the inside.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:clockwise until it engages.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent

X To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; counter-clockwise.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; clockwise until itengages.

140 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the glove box air ventWhen automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

! Close the air vent when heating thevehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with airdehumidification" function. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel:clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel, only with 3-zone

automatic climate control13? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

13 Canada only.

Setting the air vents 141

Climatecontrol

Z

142

Useful information ............................ 144Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 144Driving ............................................... 144Automatic transmission ................... 152Refueling ............................................ 158Parking ............................................... 164Driving tips ........................................ 166Driving systems ................................ 173Towing a trailer ................................. 212

143

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles(1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),drive in program E.RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before thetachometer needle isÔ of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesRDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can impair the functionality of theKEYLESS-GO key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stopbutton.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. The vehicle can bestarted with the Start/Stop button if theSmartKey is in the vehicle. Electricallypowered equipment can be operated.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockX Insert Start/Stop button: into ignitionlock;.

i When you insert Start/Stop button:into ignition lock;, the system needsapproximately 2 seconds recognition time.You can then use Start/Stop button:.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada onlyX Position 0: if Start/Stop button: has notyet been pressed, this corresponds to thekey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button:.You can now activate the windshieldwipers, for example.

i If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply isdeactivated.

X Position 2: (ignition): press Start/Stopbutton: twice.

i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 263).

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

146 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

General notesi Vehicles with a gasoline engine: thecatalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X To start a gasoline engine: turn theSmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock(Y page 145) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

X To start a diesel engine: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 145).The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the% preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the SmartKey to position3(Y page 145) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

i You can start the engine without preglowif the engine is warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineYou can start the engine if a valid SmartKeywith the integrated KEYLESS-GO function isin the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey withyou when leaving the vehicle, even if you onlyleave it for a short time. Pay attention to theimportant safety notes.

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 145).The engine starts.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe parking lock released. If you do notdepress the brake pedal, you can move theDIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lockremains engaged.

Driving 147

Drivingandparking

Z

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the parking brake (Y page 165).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 232).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle isstopped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesIf the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle stops moving.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 150) or a

148 DrivingDrivingandparking

malfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the¤ symbol is notdisplayed.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol isshown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i The engine can be switched offautomatically a maximum of four times(first stop and three subsequent stops) insuccession. The¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the¤ symbol isshown in green in themultifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe condition of charge of the battery is toolow.Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or thedriver's door is opened.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is notactivated and the transmission is inposition D or N.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is available

Driving 149

Drivingandparking

Z

again once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO buttonX To switch off: press button:.Indicator lamp; on button: and the¤ symbol in themultifunction display goout.

X To switch on: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

150 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 146). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 320).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 304). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positionsThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The currenttransmission position P, R, N or D appearsin the transmission position display(Y page 153) in the multifunction display.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission position and driveprogram display

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into whichtransmission positions you can changeusing the DIRECT SELECT lever.

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should selecttransmission position D and drive programE or S.

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

Engaging park position PX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in thedirection of arrow P.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while thevehicle is stationary in transmissionposition D or RRif you open the door while traveling atvery low speeds in transmission positionD or R! If the engine speed is too high or thevehicle is moving, do not shift theautomatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Theautomatic transmission could otherwise bedamaged.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using theSmartKey and remove the SmartKey.Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open one of the frontdoors.Rthe HOLD (Y page 183) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 175) function brake yourvehicle until it is stationary and at least oneof the following conditions is fulfilled:- there is a system malfunction.- the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhillgradient. The electric parking brake isthen also applied.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.

Remaining in neutral NIf the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is applied,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.RRelease the brake pedal.RRemove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.RDepress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is applied,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 164) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the transmissionmay be locked in position P. Havethe vehicle electronics checkedimmediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.The automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKeyRswitch off the engine when in Ror D and open one of the frontdoors

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. The transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programE/S(Y page 155)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Towing a trailerX When traveling downhill, switch to a lowergear if the automatic transmissionconstantly switches between two gears.

X Engaging a lower gear and reducing thespeed reduces the risk of the engineoverheating.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

Program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

X Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desireddrive program appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Automatic transmission 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

In the manual drive program, you can changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters (Y page 156).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E is characterized by thefollowing:Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and automatic transmissionsettingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gear

Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters. The transmission must be inposition D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E and S automatic drive programs.

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 156).Manual drive program M is temporarilyactivated. The selected gear andM appearin the multifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatictransmission immediately shifts into the nextgear down or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

156 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amountof time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. inthe case of lateral acceleration, during anoverrun phase or when driving on steepterrain.If manual drive program M has beendeactivated, the automatic transmissionshifts into the automatic drive program thatwas last selected, i.e. E or S.You can also deactivate manual driveprogram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter and hold it in place(Y page 156).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 155).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.

Automatic transmission 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is alwaystransmitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! To prevent ESP® from intervening, theignition must be switched off (SmartKey inposition 0 or 1) if:Rthe parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicleswith 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise bedamaged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

158 RefuelingDrivingandparking

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a gasoline engine. Do notswitch on the ignition if you accidentallyrefuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel system. Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could result indamage to the fuel system and the engine.The repair costs are high. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 367).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Refueling 159

Drivingandparking

Z

To openX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.This corresponds to key position 0: "keyremoved".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

To closeX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 249).In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 268).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 268).

160 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and removeit immediately (Y page 145).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been runcompletely dry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds(Y page 145).

X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runssmoothly.

If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds(Y page 145).

X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds untilit runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Refueling 161

Drivingandparking

Z

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

Important notes on useTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment must be operated with thereducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of thetasks performed during maintenance. Undernormal operating conditions, a tank of DEFlasts until the next service due date.When the supply of DEF is almost used up,the Check Additive See Operator'sCheck Additive See Operator'sManualManual message is shown in themultifunction display.When theDEF supply drops to aminimum, theRemaining Starts: 16Remaining Starts: 16 message is shownin the multifunction display.If the Remaining Starts: 16Remaining Starts: 16 messageappears in the multifunction display, you canstart the engine another 16 times. If DEF isnot refilled, you will subsequently be unableto start the engine. Refill the DEF tank witharound 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF or have the DEFtank refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop.Use the special DEF refill bottle when addingDEF between maintenance intervals. Contacta qualified specialist workshop with anyquestions or, if necessary, contact RoadsideAssistance (Y page 24).If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF isfrozen and there is an active warningindicator, it may not be possible to add DEF.Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in agarage, until DEF has become fluid again. Itwill then be possible to add DEF again.Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at aqualified specialist workshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaustgas aftertreatment andDEF is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes on the refillingprocedureDEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.DEF must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing and must not beswallowed. Keep DEF away from children.If you or other persons come into contact withDEF, observe the following:RRinse DEF from your skin immediately withsoap and water.RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse yourmouth out immediately. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek medical assistance withoutdelay.RChange out of clothing contaminated withDEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withDEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

! Rinse surfaces that have come intocontact with DEF immediately withwater orremove DEF using a damp cloth and coldwater. If the DEF has already crystallized,use a sponge and coldwater to clean it. DEF

162 RefuelingDrivingandparking

residues crystallize after time andcontaminate the affected surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not beadded to the fuel tank. If DEF is added tothe fuel tank, this can lead to enginedamage.

! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-tight. It could otherwise be damaged.

The DEF filler neck is under the cargocompartment floor.X Switch the ignition off.X Open the tailgate.X Lift up the cargo compartment floor(Y page 314).

X Turn DEF cap: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn DEF filler cap; counter-clockwiseand open it.Filler cap; is secured with a plastic strip.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refillbottle=.

X Set DEF refill bottle= as shown on thefiller neck and screw it on hand-tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle= downward.The DEF tank is filled. This may take up toone minute.i To top up between service intervals, fillthe DEF tank with approximately 1 gal(3.8 l) of DEF. 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF is equivalentto approximately 2 DEF refill bottles. Thenhave the DEF supply checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop and completely refilledif necessary.

X Release DEF refill bottle=.When DEF refill bottle= is no longerpressed down, filling stops. DEF refill bottle= can be removed when it has been onlypartially emptied.

X Turn DEF refill bottle= counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X PlaceDEF filler cap; on the filler neck andturn it clockwise.

Refueling 163

Drivingandparking

Z

X Replace DEF cover: as shown and turn itclockwise as far as it will go.

X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.X Close the tailgate.X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).The Check Additive See Operator'sCheck Additive See Operator'sManualManual message goes out afterapproximately one minute.i If the Check Additive SeeCheck Additive SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual message remainsshown in the multifunction display, add anadditional bottle of DEF.

For further information on DEF, see(Y page 370).

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicleequipment and become trapped. There is arisk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

164 ParkingDrivingandparking

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if thetransmission is in position P.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 145).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.i When the driver's door is closed, thiscorresponds to key position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds tokey position 0: "key removed".i In the event of an emergency, the enginecan be turned off while the vehicle is inmotion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.

X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp goes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.

Parking 165

Drivingandparking

Z

X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers

a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident is greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

166 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECOdisplay gives you information on howeconomical your driving style is. The ECOdisplay assists you in achieving the optimumdriving style in terms of consumption, takingthe actual and selected conditions intoconsideration. Your driving style cansignificantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higherpercentage indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentage

count in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not taken intoconsideration by the ECO display.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

Driving tips 167

Drivingandparking

Z

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display(Y page 224).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

168 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. If you areplanning to have the vehicle tested on sucha dynamometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain furtherinformation first. Otherwise, you coulddamage the drive train or the brake system.

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (SmartKey in position0 or 1 in the ignition lock) when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brakedynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towedwiththe front or rear axle raised (notpermitted for vehicles with 4MATIC).

Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.

You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 68).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.If you drive on wet roads or dirt-coveredsurfaces, road salt and/or dirt could get intothe parking brake.In order to prevent corrosion and a reductionin the braking power of the parking brake,observe the following:Rgently depress the parking brake from timeto time before beginning the journey.Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) ata maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Driving tips 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Prevent water from entering the vehicleinterior or the engine compartment. If youmust drive through standing water, bear inmind that:Rthe maximum permissible fording depth instill water is 12 in (30 cm)Ryou should drive no faster than at walkingpace

Off-road fording! Under no circumstances should youaccelerate before entering the water. Thebow wave could cause water to enter anddamage the engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doorswhile fording. Otherwise, water could get

into the vehicle interior and damage thevehicle's electronics and interiorequipment.REstablish how deep the water is and thecharacteristics of the body of water beforefording.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place andat a steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed throughthe water.RDo not stop.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form asyou drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread afterfording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 375).

Winter driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

170 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 332).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 332).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 333).

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the road

surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There isa risk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possiblymixedwith oil, for example, could getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and alsoin increased wear and tear. The brakingcharacteristics change depending on thematerial ingressing the brakes. Clean thebrakes after driving off-road. If you detect areduced braking effect or grinding noises,have the brake system checked in a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.Adapt your driving style to the differentbraking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly orsystems. Adapt your driving style to suit theterrain conditions. Drive carefully. Havedamage to the vehicle rectified immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is

Driving tips 171

Drivingandparking

Z

too steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.

General notes

H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving overmoregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristicsof your vehicle and the gear shift operationbefore driving through difficult terrain.

Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is in motion, stop thevehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.Check the engine oil level. The engine oilwarning lampwarningmust not be ignored.Continuing the journey while the symbol isdisplayed could lead to engine damage.

Checklist after driving off-roadDriving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving onnormal roads. After driving off-road, checkthe vehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accidentto yourself and other road users.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:Ruse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift to a lower gear appropriateto the terrain.Rdrive quickly to overcome the rollingresistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheelscould become stuck in loose ground.Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles ifpossible. Make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- the ground clearance of the vehicle issufficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roadsObserve the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:

! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Driving over obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger shouldalways keep a safe distance from thevehicle when doing so in order to avoidinjury as a result of unexpected vehiclemovements. After driving off-road or overobstacles, check the vehicle for possibledamage, especially to the underbody andthe components of the chassis.

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and otherobstacles:Ravoid high engine speeds.Rshift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.

172 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Rdrive very slowly.Rtry to drive straight over the center ofobstacles: front wheel first, then rearwheel.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There isa risk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

RObserve the rules on off-road driving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclinesor gradients, but instead follow the directline of fall.RDrive slowly.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive atappropriate engine speeds (maximum3,000 rpm).RShift to a lower gear using the left-handpaddle shifter before tackling steepdownhill gradients.RWhen driving down an incline, make use ofthe engine's braking effect. Observe theengine speed; do not overrev the engine.RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-roaddriving.

i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill. For further information abouthill start assist, see (Y page 148).

Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient istoo steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.Always observe the approach/departureangle values (Y page 376).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradientclimbing ability values (Y page 376).

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the acceleratorimmediately before reaching the brow of thehill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus totravel over the brow.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steepinclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight.Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,tip and rollover.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handpaddle shifter before tackling steepdownhill gradients.RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakegently. When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the lineof fall.RCheck that the brakes areworking normallyafter a long downhill stretch.

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. You mustselect a low gear in good time on long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

so, you will make use of the braking effect ofthe engine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

i Cruise control should not be activatedwhen driving off-road.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the multifunction display,the segments between the stored speed andthe maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; beyond the pressurepoint.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruiseControl OffControl Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.You must select a low gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, especiallyif the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storingand maintaining the current speed

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not beactivated.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating while drivingWhen driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off anda tone sounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS OverrideDISTRONIC PLUS Overridemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Activating when driving towards astationary vehicleIf the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 20mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in fronthas been detected. For this reason, it ishelpful if you have the DISTRONIC PLUSdistance display shown in the instrumentcluster (Y page 228).

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speedis set.

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 180).

Pulling awayX If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

DrivingIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is driving faster, it accelerates yourvehicle, but only up to the speed you havestored.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in front

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 181).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind the

vehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically toposition P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; beyond the pressurepoint.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Storing the current speed or calling upa stored speedX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 180).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle infront if necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; indirection:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in themultifunction display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 228) of theon-board computer, you can select theassistance display.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivatedX Select the Assist. GraphicAssist. Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 228).

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, youwill see the following in the multifunctiondisplay:

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivatedX Select the Assist. GraphicAssist. Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 228).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONICPLUS.After this time, you will see the following inthe multifunction display while DISTRONICPLUS is activated:

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS activated

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.If the vehicle has been stopped byDISTRONICPLUS and amalfunction occurs in the system,the BrakeBrake ImmediatelyImmediatelymessage appears inthe multifunction display. Depress the brakepedal immediately so that the vehicle doesnot roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated, and the message disappears.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function whendriving off-road, on steep uphill or downhillgradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicleon such surfaces.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 184).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has beenautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe hood is closed.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntilë appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilëdisappears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.When the HOLD function is activated invehicles with an automatic transmission, thetransmission is shifted automatically toposition P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hood.The sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while the

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

HOLD function is still activated. If you attemptto lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until the HOLDfunction has been deactivated.

If there is a malfunction in the system orpower supply while the HOLD function isactivated, the BrakeBrake ImmediatelyImmediatelymessageis shown in the multifunction display.Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.You can also shift the transmission to positionP. This deactivates the HOLD function.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and four sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 309).

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Side view

Top view

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a

warning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC; Indicator lamp

If indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Towing a trailer! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer towhitch is not required. PARKTRONICmeasures the minimum detection range toan obstacle from the bumper, not the ballcoupling.

PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately fiveseconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately fiveseconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 309).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. Active steering interventioncan assist you during parking. You may alsouse PARKTRONIC (Y page 185). WhenPARKTRONIC is switched off, Active ParkingAssist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGThe vehicle swings out when parking and indoing so could cross into the opposite lane.This could result in a collision with anotherroad user. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users whenparking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or

cancel the Active Parking Assist parkingprocedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to theparking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered, overgrownor partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 186) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.Rwhen snow chains or an emergency sparewheel are mounted, you should not useActive Parking Assist here either.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles. In some circumstances, ActiveParking Assist may therefore guide you intothe parking space too early.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist is switched onautomatically when driving forwards. Thesystem is operational at speeds of up toapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While inoperation, the system independently locatesand measures parking spaces on both sidesof the vehicle. When driving at speeds below19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parkingsymbol as a status indicator in the instrumentcluster. By default, Active Parking Assist onlydisplays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on thedriver's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. To parkon the driver's side, you must leave thedriver's side turn signal switched on. Thismust remain switched on until youacknowledge the use of Active Parking Assistby pressing thea button on themultifunction steering wheel.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears.

Example: detected parking space: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer thanyour vehicle

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you byintervening actively in the steering. If you donot brake there is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces parallel to the directionof travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by anobstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundings

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brakeat all times. When backing up, drive at aspeed below approximately 6 mph(10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tightparking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Further transmission shifts may benecessary.

As soon as the parking procedure iscomplete, the Park Assist DisabledPark Assist Disabledmessage appears and awarning tone sounds.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions. When Active

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking Assist is finished, you must steeragain yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messagesdisplayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 186).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you shouldcancel the parking procedure with ActiveParking Assist.RYou can also engage forward gearprematurely. The vehicle redirects anddoes not drive as far into the parking space.Should a gear be changed too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. Asensible parking position can no longer beachieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist cansupport you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must notbe too wide, as the position of the vehiclemust not exceed an angle of 45° to thestarting position as it is maneuvering intothe parking space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal on the side facingthe street.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, beingready to brake at all times. Do not exceeda maximum speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parkingspace. Otherwise Active Parking Assist willbe canceled.

X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-aheadposition.

X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, beingready to brake at all times.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Once you have exited the parking spacecompletely, the steering wheel is moved tothe straight-ahead position. You hear a toneand the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on thecenter console (Y page 187).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceledautomatically if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph(10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Towing a trailerFor vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, theminimum length for parking spaces is slightlyincreased.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,you should not use Active Parking Assist.Once the electrical connection is establishedbetween your vehicle and the trailer, ActiveParking Assist is no longer available.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.

Rear view camera

General notes

: Rear view camera

Rear view camera: is located in the handlestrip of the tailgate.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to showthe area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are always

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

responsible for safe maneuvering andparking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. Inthis event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of thevehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicyclerack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

X To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"setting is active in COMAND, see theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.

X To change the function mode forvehicles with trailer tow hitch: using theCOMAND controller, select symbol: forthe "Reverse parking" function orsymbol; for "Coupling up a trailer" (seethe separate COMAND operatinginstructions).The symbol of the selected function ishighlighted.

To deactivate: the rear view cameradeactivates in vehicles with an automatictransmission if you shift the transmission toP or after driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the Audio/COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

: White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional messages for vehicles withPARKTRONIC: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: ifPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 186), anadditional operational readiness indicator willappear in COMAND display;. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in theCOMAND display.

"Reverse parking" functionX Make sure that the rear view camera isactivated and the "Reverse parking"function is selected; see the separateoperating instructions for the audiosystem/COMAND.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 193).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide,carefully back up until you reach the endposition.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almostparallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

Turning the steering wheel: Red guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

; Parking space markingX Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 193).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of theparking space until yellow guide line:reaches parking space marking;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking aspossible.

Driving to the final position: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centerposition while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning thesteering wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

"Coupling up a trailer" functionThis function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch and COMAND.

! The following distance specificationsrefer to trailer tow hitches with ballcoupling that have been approved for thisvehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances maydiffer if you use other ball couplings. In thiscase, take into account that actualdistances will not match the followingdistance specifications. Otherwise youcould damage the trailer and vehicle.

: Vehicle center point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 3 ft(1 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar= Ball coupling

This function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch.X Set the height of trailer drawbar; so thatit is slightly higher than ball coupling=.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front oftrailer drawbar;.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Ball coupling; Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30m) from the ballcoupling

= Trailer drawbar marker assistant? Trailer drawbarA Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"

functionX Select symbolA using the COMANDcontroller, see COMAND.The "Coupling up a trailer" function isselected. The distance specifications nowonly apply to objects that are at the samelevel as the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar marker assistant= pointsapproximately in the direction of trailerdrawbar?.

X Reverse carefully until the trailerdrawbar? reaches red guide line;.

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 212).

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from thefollowing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear viewmirrors

The cameras capture the immediatesurroundings of the vehicle. The systemsupports you, e.g. when parking or if vision isrestricted at an exit.The 360° camera images can be shown in fullscreenmode or in seven different split-screenviews on the COMAND display. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle.This view is calculated from the data suppliedby the installed cameras (virtual camera).The seven split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and picture from the front camera(without displaying the maximum steeringwheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles withtrailer tow hitch)Rtop view and pictures from the rearwardfacing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and pictures from the forwardfacing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

i The top view and trailer view are availablefor vehicles equipped with a trailer towhitch.

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from position D or R to N, yousee the previous view in the COMANDdisplay. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360° camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

The 360° camera may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not atall. It cannot show objects in the followingareas:Runder the front bumperRvery close to the front bumperRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on thetrunk lidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsYou are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to yoursurroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This applies to the areasbehind, in front of and beside the vehicle. Youcould otherwise endanger yourself andothers.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRthe tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif you exit a heated garage in winter,resulting in a rapid change in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360°cameraRCOMAND is switched on, see the separateCOMAND operating instructionsRthe 360° Camera360° Camera function is activatedActivating the 360° camera using theSYS buttonX Press and hold the W button for longerthan 2 seconds, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image fromthe front cameraRfull screen display with the image fromthe rear camera

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX Press the W button, see the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

X Select SystemSystem by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

X Select 360° Camera360° Camera and pressW toconfirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

For further information about the COMANDcontroller, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can beautomatically displayed by engaging reversegear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear setting is active in COMAND, see theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The COMAND display shows the areabehind the vehicle in split screen:Rvehicle with guide linesRtop view of the vehicle

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysX To switch between split screen views:switch to the line with the vehicle icons bysliding ZV the COMAND controller.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller andselect one of the vehicle symbols.

X To switch to full screen mode: selectFull ScreenFull Screen by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

D Bumper

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

Top view with picture from the frontcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the frontof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the frontof the vehicle

B Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from thefront of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating thedistance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with picture from the mirrorcamera

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right sideof vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the trailer view setting; Trailer drawbar marker assistant= Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30m) from the ballcoupling

Display with the PARKTRONIC display

Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONICdisplay: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rear

view camera imageIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 187),warning displays; in the COMAND displayare also active or light up accordingly.PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellowbrackets around the vehicle icon in the topview, orRin the full screen view, on the right-handside at the bottomas red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

i The full screen display can also beselected as front view.

Exiting 360° camera display modeAs soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of19 mph (30 km/h) with the functionactivated, the function switches off. TheCOMAND display switches back to thepreviously selected view. You can also switchthe display by selecting the& symbol in thedisplay and pressingW the COMANDcontroller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and lengthof journey

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if thesurface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND ormaking a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 229).

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes after yourjourney has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: DrowsinessAttention Assist: Drowsinessdetecteddetected message appears in themultifunction display.X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea button to confirm themessage.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. Theprecondition for this is thatATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

The assistance graphic shows theésymbol when ATTENTION ASSIST isdeactivated (Y page 228).

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 202) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 204).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

sensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 229) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer,make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting. In this event,Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicatorlamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrorsand the Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyBlind Spot Assist CurrentlyUnavailable See Operator's ManualUnavailable See Operator's Manual

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

i You can deactivate the indicator lamps inthe exterior mirrors.To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lockRthe engine is not runningRthe electrical connection to the trailerhas been established

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 230), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themilesmiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.

G WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 229).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 228) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. ahighway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 209).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of yourvehicle which are behind the driver. Awarningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblewarning. If a risk of lateral collision isdetected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. To support the course-

correcting brake application, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radarsensor system. The free space is thenevaluated in the direction of travel and to theside before a course-correcting brakeapplication is initiated.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe operational.

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It doesnot detect all traffic situations and road usersand is no substitute for attentive driving.Always ensure that there is sufficientdistance to the side for other road users andobstacles.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficientdistance on the side for other traffic orobstacles.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detectnarrow vehicles, such as motorcycles orbicycles, or may only detect them too late.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assistuses radar sensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensorsare integrated into the front and rear bumpersrespectively. An additional radar sensor islocated behind the cover in the radiator grill.Make sure that the sensors and areas aroundthem are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging cargo. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp: in the exteriormirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and acoustic collision warningWhen you switch on the turn signals tochange lanes and a vehicle is detected in theside monitoring range, you receive a visualand acoustic collision warning. You then hear

a double warning tone and red warninglamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by theflashing of red warning lamp:. There are nofurther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou or makes a course-correcting brakeapplication. Always maintain a safe distanceat the sides.

In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. Aninappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction or accelerate.If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between20mph (30 km/h) and 120mph (200 km/h).If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and the following is shown inthe multifunction display, for example:

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Either a very slight course-correcting brakeapplication, or none at all, may occur if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Rthe off-road program is activated.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 229) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting. Active Blind SpotAssist is then deactivated. The indicator lamplights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and theActive Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyActive Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyUnavailable See Operator's ManualUnavailable See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notesActive Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of acamera: mounted at the top of thewindshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist

detects lane markings on the road and warnsyou before you leave your laneunintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 230), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take intoaccount the road, traffic and weatherconditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannotcontinuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.Terminate the intervention in a non-criticaldriving situation.

The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand there are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn you

by means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. ahighway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brakeapplication.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionallydriving over a solid lane marking. There is arisk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certaincircumstances the vehicle will brake brieflyon one side. This is meant to assist you inbringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid,recognizable lane marking. Before this, awarning must be given by means ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel.In addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized. The brakeapplication also slightly reduces vehiclespeed.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,the following, for example, appears in themultifunction display:

i A further lane-correcting brakeapplication can only occur after yourvehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou switch on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, theelectrical connection to the trailer has beencorrectly established.RESP® is switched off.

Rthe transmission is not in position D.Rthe off-road program is activated.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. Aninappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRuse a turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application isinterrupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 229).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 228) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoidan obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting.

Towing a trailer

Notes on towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. Thevehicle/trailer combination could evenrollover. There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if adetachable trailer coupling is used.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towing

vehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found:Rin the vehicle documentsRon the identification plates of the trailer towhitch, the trailer and the vehicle

If the values differ, the lowest value applies.You will find the values approved by themanufacturer on the vehicle identificationplates and those for the towing vehicle under"Technical data" (Y page 376).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration andgradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handlingcharacteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weatherconditions. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible speed for your vehicle/trailercombination.

212 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribedmaximum speed for vehicle/trailercombinations in the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are notsuitable for installing detachable trailercouplings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings orother detachable trailer couplings on thebumpers of your vehicle.RTo reduce the risk of damage to the ballcoupling, remove it from the ball couplingrecess when not in use.

i When towing a trailer, set the tirepressure on the rear axle of the towingvehicle for a maximum load; see the tirepressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 351).

Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 185) is only availablewith limitations or not at all.

i On vehicles without level control, theheight of the ball coupling will alteraccording to the load placed on the vehicle.If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 376).

Driving tipsi Observe the notes on ESP® trailerstabilization (Y page 71).

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what themaximum permissible speed is. Observe the

legally prescribed maximum speed in therelevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, themaximum permissible rear axle load isincreased when towing a trailer. Refer to the"Technical data" section to find out whetherthis applies to your vehicle.If you utilize any of the added maximum rearaxle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed amaximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) forreasons concerning the operating permit.This also applies in countries in which thepermissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph(100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control.

This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required tomaintain the speed. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather thancontinuously.

Driving tipsRMaintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brakegently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbingcapabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engineand, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-

Towing a trailer 213

Drivingandparking

Z

climbing capability, decreases withincreasing altitude.

If the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly the trailer may come loose. There isa risk of an accident.Install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed in the ball coupling installationinstructions. Make sure that the ball couplingis installed and secured correctly before everyjourney.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use ball couplings that have beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Cover capX Pull protective cap: in the direction of thearrow, out of ball coupling recess;.

X Store protective cap: in a safe place.X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly it can become detached while the

vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed in the ball coupling installationinstructions. Make sure that the ball couplingis installed and secured correctly before everyjourney.

Coupling up a trailerObserve the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most U.S. states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:Rsafety chains between the towing vehicleand the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. Theymustbe fastened to the vehicle's trailercoupling, not to the bumper or the axle.Leave enough play in the chains to maketight cornering possible.Ra separate brake system for certain typesof trailer.Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Checkthe specific legal requirements applicableto your state.If the trailer detaches from the towingvehicle, the safety switch applies thetrailer's brakes.

! Do not connect the trailer's brake system(if featured) to the hydraulic brake systemof the towing vehicle, as the latter isequipped with an anti-lock brake system.Doing so will result in a loss of function ofthe brake systems of both the vehicle andthe trailer.

i The vehicle's wiring harness features aconnection to the brake indicator lamp.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Close all doors and the tailgate.

214 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

X Couple up the trailer.X Establish all electrical connections.

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirementsconcerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speedrestrictions. Make sure that your car/trailercombination complies with the localregulations:Rin your place of residenceRin the location to which you are drivingThe police and local authorities can providereliable information.Observe the following when towing a trailer:RTo gain driving experience and to becomeaccustomed to the new handlingcharacteristics, you should practice thefollowing in a traffic-free location:- cornering- stopping- backing upRBefore driving, check:

- the trailer tow hitch- the safety switch for braked trailers- the safety chains- electrical connections- the lights- the wheelsRAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer has electronically controlledbrakes, pull away carefully. Brake manuallyusing the brake controller and checkwhether the brakes function correctly.RSecure any objects on the trailer to preventthe cargo from slipping when the vehicle isin motion.RWhen you couple up a trailer, check atregular intervals that the load is firmlysecured. If the trailer is equipped with

trailer lights and brakes, check the trailerto ensure that these are working.RBear in mind that the handling will be lessstable when towing a trailer than whendriving without one. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,accelerates more slowly, has a decreasedgradient climbing capability and a longerbraking distance.It is more susceptible to side winds andrequires more careful steering.RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depressthe brake pedal moderately at first, so thatthe trailer can activate its own brakes. Thenincrease the pressure on the brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedlyshifts between gears on uphill or downhillgradients, shift to a lower gear using theleft-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.A lower gear and lower speed reduce therisk of engine failure.RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gearto utilize the engine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, ifinstalled, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increasesdramatically while the air-conditioningsystem is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.Coolant heat can additionally be dissipatedby opening the windows and by setting theblower fan and the interior temperature tomaximum.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attentionto the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.Due to the length of the vehicle/trailercombination, you require additional roadspace in relation to the vehicle you areovertaking, before you can change back tothe original lane.

Towing a trailer 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by therebounding of the overrun brake.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Close all doors and the tailgate.X Apply the trailer's parking brake.X Remove the trailer cable and decouple thetrailer.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbarloads

Weight specificationsThe gross trailer weight is calculated byadding the weight of the trailer to the weightof the load and equipment on the trailer.You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 376).

Loading a trailerRWhen loading the trailer, make sure thatneither the permissible gross weight of thetrailer nor the gross vehicle weight isexceeded. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.You can find the maximum permissiblevalues on the type plates of your vehicleand the trailer. When calculating howmuchweight the vehicle and trailer may carry,

pay attention to the respective lowestvalues.RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball couplingmust be added to the rear axle load to avoidexceeding the permissible gross axleweight. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailerload where the trailer drawbar noseweightaccounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer'spermissible gross weight.

i The weight of other accessories,passengers and loads reduces:Rthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible noseweight that yourvehicle can tow

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRTo ensure compliance of the weight of thetowing vehicle and the trailer with themaximum permissible values, have thevehicle/trailer combination (towing vehicleincluding driver, passenger, load and fullyladen trailer) weighed on a calibratedweighbridge.RCheck the gross axle weight rating of thefront and rear axles, the gross weight of thetrailer and trailer drawbar load.

Removing the ball couplingX Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

X Press the protective cap into the ballcoupling recess.

X Make sure that the protective cap is firmlyin place.

216 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Storing the ball coupling

G WARNINGDo not carry the ball coupling in the vehicleinterior if it is not secured.Otherwise, you and others could be injured bythe ball coupling being thrown around if you:Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accident

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Trailer power supplyThe trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factorywith a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 4.

! You can connect accessories with amaximum power consumption of 240 W tothe permanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

Towing a trailer 217

Drivingandparking

Z

218

Useful information ............................ 220Important safety notes .................... 220Displays and operation .................... 220Menus and submenus ...................... 223Display messages ............................. 235Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 261

219

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248‡(120†), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

220 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 222).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 173):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 175):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

OverviewThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back button

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

Displays and operation 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling of thephone book if it is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction displayValues and settings as well as displaymessages are shown in the multifunctiondisplay.

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program (Y page 153)? Transmission position (Y page 153)A TimeB Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 231)X To show menu bar;: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar; disappears after a few seconds.

222 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Text field: shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Shift recommendation

(Y page 156)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 173)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 116)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 148)ë HOLD function (Y page 183)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 221).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 223)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 225)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 226)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 227)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 228)RServServ menu (Y page 230)RSett.Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 230)The AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTelmenus differ slightlyin vehicles with an audio system and invehicles with COMAND. The examples givenin this Operator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey,whereas the values in the From ResetFrom Resetsubmenu are calculated from the last time thesubmenu was reset (Y page 224).The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

Menus and submenus 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecurrent fuel consumption and approximaterange.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.Further information on the ECO display(Y page 167).

Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 156); Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer"From Start" are likewise reset. When youreset the values in the trip computer "FromStart", the values in the "ECO display"arelikewise reset.

224 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.X Switch on the audio system with Becker®MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distanceindicator shortens towards the top of thedisplay as you approach the point of theannounced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= New lane during a change of direction? Uninterrupted laneA Lane recommendationB Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendationA for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Menus and submenus 225

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along withstation; if this has been stored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separateoperating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select the audio player or medium, seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired track hasbeen reached.

If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

226 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired scenehas been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.

X Switch on your mobile phone and audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to theaudio system or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display, for example:

Example: incoming callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not inthe TelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.

Menus and submenus 227

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 228)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 229)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 229)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 229)

Displaying the assistance graphicX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic (Y page 180).

The assistance graphic can display the statusof and information fromother driving systemsor driving safety systems.The assistance graphic shows:Rtheé symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 201) is deactivated.Rthe lanemarkings as bright lineswhen LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 204) or Active LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 209) is activated.

228 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Rtheæ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 72) is deactivated.Rthe è symbol, when the rear windowwiper (Y page 123) is activated.

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbolin the multifunction display.

If the PRE-SAFE Brake: SensorsPRE-SAFE Brake: SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated message appears, the radarsensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 233).

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 72).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention AssistAttention Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the

multifunction display in the assistancegraphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 201).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

If the Blind Spot Assist SensorsBlind Spot Assist SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst.Act. Blind Spot Asst.Sensors DeactivatedSensors Deactivated message appears,the radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 233).

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 202).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 206).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. Asst.Lane Keep. Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lane

Menus and submenus 229

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

markings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 204).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 209).

Maintenance menu

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages(Y page 235)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Canada only) (Y page 337)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(USA only) (Y page 338)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 300)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettingsmenu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 230)RChanging the light settings (Y page 231)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 232)

RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 233)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 234)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or milesin the multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstr. ClusterInstr. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRcurrent consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

230 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display:Permanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offDaytime running lamps are required by law(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytimerunning lamps" function via the on-boardcomputer.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDay LightsDay Lights function.If the Day LightsDay Lights function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 113).

Setting the brightness of the display/switchX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches:function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Level 1Level 1 toLevel 5Level 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAdapt. HighbeamAdapt. Highbeam function.If the Adapt.Adapt. HighbeamHighbeam function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 116).

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the SurroundSurroundLightingLighting function and the light switch is settoÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 113).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the tailgate,the exterior lighting goes off after5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.If the InteriorInterior LightingLighting DelayDelay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interioris displayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function.When the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locksfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 82).

232 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175)RBAS PLUS (Y page 68)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 202)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206)

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 105).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 58).

Switching the fold-in mirrors with thelocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 109).This function is only available in Canada.When you activate the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open a door, theexterior mirrors fold out again.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you have switched the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function on and you fold the exteriormirrors in using the button on the door(Y page 107), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectNoNo or YesYes.

X Press thea button to confirm theselection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Day LightsDay Lights functionin the LightsLights submenu is only reset if thevehicle is stationary.

234 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 183) and parking (Y page 164).

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThemessage memory allows you to call up previous display messages.X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages2 messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages2 messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarilyunavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 309).

X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSor the distance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Front LeftFront LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear LeftRear LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear CenterRear CenterMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or RightRightSide CurtainSide CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

240 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 49).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsFor further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 49).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag(Y page 49).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

242 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 49).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck LeftCheck LeftCorneringCorneringLightLightorCheck RightCheck RightCornering LightCornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeamorCheck RightCheck RightLow BeamLow Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck TrailerTrailer LeftLeftTail LampTail LamporCheckCheckTrailerTrailer RightRight TailTailLampLamp

The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

Display messages 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck TrailerTrailer LeftLeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckTrailerTrailer RightRight TurnTurnSignalSignal

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

bCheck TrailerCheck TrailerBrake LampBrake Lamp

The trailer brake lamp is defective.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckRear Right TurnRear Right TurnSignalSignal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckFront Right TurnFront Right TurnSignalSignal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckRight Mirror TurnRight Mirror TurnSignalSignal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brakeand BrakeLampsLampsorCheck RightCheck RightTail and BrakeTail and BrakeLampsLamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

244 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or Check RightCheck RightHigh BeamHigh Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LicenseLicensePlate LampPlate Lamp or CheckCheckRight LicenseRight LicensePlate LampPlate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamp or Check RightCheck RightFog LampFog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParkingParkingLampLamp or Check FrontCheck FrontRight Parking LampRight Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft ReverseReverseLampLamp or Check RightCheck RightReverse LampReverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 119).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarkerSidemarkerLampLamp or Check FrontCheck FrontRight SidemarkerRight SidemarkerLampLamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarkerSidemarkerLampLamp or Check RearCheck RearRight SidemarkerRight SidemarkerLampLamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunningRunningLightLight or CheckCheckRight DaytimeRight DaytimeRunning LightRunning Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

246 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available againAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available againmessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 304).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

248 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 303).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 303).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

Display messages 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¸Replace Air FilterReplace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel FilterCheck Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¯Refill AdBlue AtRefill AdBlue AtWorkshop SeeWorkshop SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The DEF level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tonealso sounds.X Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

¯Refill AdBlue AtRefill AdBlue AtWorkshop No StartWorkshop No Startin .. kmin .. km

The DEF level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. Awarning tone also sounds.X Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

¯Refill AdBlue AtRefill AdBlue AtWorkshop Eng.Workshop Eng.Start Not PossibleStart Not Possible

The DEF tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can nolonger start the engine.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯Check AdBlue SeeCheck AdBlue SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

250 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

¯Eng. Start NotEng. Start NotPossible in ..kmPossible in ..km

The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯Eng. Start NotEng. Start NotPossiblePossible

The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.You can no longer start the engine.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 183).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 183).

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDeactivated SeeDeactivated SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 233).

Display messages 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator'sOperator'sManualManual or ActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssistAssistInoperativeInoperative or ActivActive Lane Keepinge Lane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator'sOperator'sManualManual or ActiveActiveBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Clean the sensors (Y page 309).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative or ActivActive Blind Spote Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistPark AssistCanceledCanceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that themultifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 188).

Display messages 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Park AssistPark AssistInoperativeInoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again afterapproximately ten minutes (Y page 188).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistPark AssistFinishedFinished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 175). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 175).

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 309).

X Restart the engine.

254 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake

may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 175).

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 173).

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheckTire Pressure SoonTire Pressure Soon

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 314).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tirepressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 337).

CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressureThen Restart RunThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorFlat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 337).

Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

CorrectCorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 338).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 341).

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 314).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 338).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 314).

Display messages 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) MissingSensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Risk of RollingRisk of RollingShift to 'P'Shift to 'P'

You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop buttonwhile the transmission was not in position P.X Shift the transmission to position P.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower SteeringPower SteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 305).

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 79).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164)(Y page 164).

X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected inKey Detected inVehicleVehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

ÂRemove 'Start'Remove 'Start'Button and InsertButton and InsertKeyKey

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58).The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thecar is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy themalfunction.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are therefore alsodeactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are therefore also deactivated, forexample.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BASPLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function,hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also unavailable,for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are alsounavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֊

The yellow ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 70).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 70).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷äå

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization areunavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 43).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarninglamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect inthese states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion. In addition,the; Check Enginewarning lamp may lightup.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.

270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM SolutionsX Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

G WARNINGThe distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.There is a risk of an accident.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGYou are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175) andPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 314).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 338).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

272 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Useful information ............................ 274Loading guidelines ............................ 274Stowage areas .................................. 275Features ............................................. 282

273

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, installed accessories, vehicleoccupants and luggage/cargo.The gross load limit and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle mustnever be exceeded. The gross load limit and

the GVWR are specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door (Y page 342).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. The specifications for GVWR andGAWR are on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 342).Further information can be found in the"Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 342).The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RThe cargo compartment is the preferredplace to carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards aspossible and as low down in the cargocompartment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RHook in the cargo net (if installed) whenloading.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

274 Loading guidelinesStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

i The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 141).

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press left-hand button; or right-hand button:.The stowage compartment opens.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for portable audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate Audio or COMANDOperating Instructions).

Stowage areas 275

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowagecompartment before folding the rear seatarmrest back into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down seat armrest;.X Fold cover: of the armrest upwards.

Stowage netStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left-hand sideof the cargo compartment.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 275).

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could foldforwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intended

level of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargocompartment cannot be restrained by theseat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274).The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the cargo compartment capacity.

Folding the rear seat backrest forward

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 102).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand releasehandle; of the seat backrest forwards.Corresponding seat backrest: isreleased.

X Fold backrest: forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

276 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Folding the rear seat backrest back

: Backrest; Lock verification indicator= Backrest release handleX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 102).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

G WARNINGThe Top Tether anchorages cannot secure aload. If you secure a load with the Top Tetheranchorages, the Top Tether anchorages couldbe pulled out during braking, abrupt changesin direction or in the event of an accident. Theload could slip, tip over or be flung around andthereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a riskof injury.

Only use the cargo tie down rings whensecuring a load.

Observe the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 274).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.There are four cargo tie down rings in thecargo compartment and two in the rear-compartment footwells14.

: Cargo tie-down rings in the cargocompartment

14 Canada only.

Stowage areas 277

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

: Cargo tie down rings in the rear-compartment footwell (Canada only)

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items ofluggage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 11lbs (5kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

There is one bag hook on the left side wall inthe cargo compartment and there are twohooks on the right and left of the lowerD-pillartrim.

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the eventof an accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargocompartment higher than the lower edge ofthe side windows. Do not place heavyobjects on top of the cargo compartmentcover.

The cargo compartment cover is locatedbehind the rear bench seat backrest.

i You can fold up the solid section of thecargo compartment cover approximately45° to facilitate loading the cargocompartment.

Extending/retracting the cargocompartment cover

278 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X To extend: pull cargo compartmentcover: back and clip it into the retainerson the left and right.

X To retract: unhook cargo compartmentcover: from the retainers on the left andright and guide it forwards by the grabhandle until it is fully retracted.

Installing/removing the cargocompartment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargocompartment cover: is rolled up.

X Press handle; on the right underside tothe left.

X Remove cargo compartment cover:.

X To install: attach cargo compartmentcover: to the opening on the left-handside.

X Press handle; to the left.X Allow cargo compartment cover: toengage in the appropriate recess.

Cargo net

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. There

is an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.

Preparing the cargo netThe cargo net can be used in two differentpositions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar).

RThe brackets behind B-pillar: arerequired for the cargo compartmentenlargement (Y page 276).The corresponding cargo tie down rings totighten the net are located in the footwellof the rear bench seat (Y page 277).RThe brackets behind C-pillar; arerequired for the cargo compartment behindthe rear bench seat.The corresponding cargo tie down rings totension the net are located in the cargocompartment (Y page 277).

The cargo net is located in the loading tray inthe stowage well under the cargocompartment floor (Y page 281).

Stowage areas 279

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove thecargo net.

X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.The upper and lower guide rods mustengage audibly.

Attaching the cargo net

Cargo net installed behind the C-pillarX Insert guide rod; into retainer: in thedirection of the arrow.

X Slide guide rod; forwards intoretainer: in the direction of the arrow.

Tightening the cargo net

Seat belt reel holder behind the front seatsX Insert belt hook: into cargo tie-downring; in the direction of the arrow.

X Pull tensioning strap= by the loose end inthe direction of the arrow until the cargonet is tight.

X After driving a short distance, check thetension of the cargo net and retighten it ifnecessary.

Releasing the cargo net

Seat belt reel holder behind the front seatsX Pull belt adjuster: upwards in thedirection of the arrow to reduce the tensionon the tensioning strap.

X Unhook belt hook; from cargo tie-downring=.

Detaching and storing the cargo netX Detach guide rod; from bracket:(Y page 280).

X Press the red button on the upper and lowerguide rods.

X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.X Close the twoVelcro fasteners on the cargonet holder.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

280 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage well under the cargocompartment floor

G WARNINGIf you drivewhen the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

X To open: open the tailgate.X Holding the ribbing, press handle:downwards;.Handle: folds up.

X Swing the cargo compartment floorupwards using handle: until it restsagainst the cargo compartment cover.

X Release hook= from the bracket on theunderside of the cargo compartment floor.

X Engage hook= into rain trough?.

i Stowage compartmentsA andB can beused to stow small, light and flat objects.

! Before you close the tailgate, unhook thehook from the rain trough and fold the trunkfloor down.

X To close: unhook hook= from raintrough?.

X Fasten hook= to the bracket on theunderside of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.X Press the cargo compartment floor downuntil it engages.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the drivingcharacteristics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering andbraking, will be greatly impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Stowage areas 281

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel fully andopen the tailgate fully when the roof carrieris installed.

The maximum roof load is 165 lbs(75 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload could become detached from thevehicle. Therefore, always comply with theinstallation instructions supplied by themanufacturer of the roof carrier.

Attaching the roof carrierX Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holder

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch:.Cup holder; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover backdown, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

282 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction ofthe arrow.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

X To open: slide cover: forwards.X To remove: open the cover of ashtray=.X Hold ashtray= at the sides and lift itup; and out.

X To re-install: press ashtray= into theholder until engages.

X Close the lid of ashtray=.X To close: pull cover: back.

Rear-compartment ashtray

Features 283

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: press releasebutton= and lift the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To open: slide cover: forwards.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

X To close: pull cover: back.

12 V sockets

General notesThe sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: slide cover: forwards.X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: pull cover: back.

284 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shockif the connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualifiedspecializedworkshop if it is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a115 V power socket that is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There isa risk of fatal injury.

Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notes115 V power socket: provides analternating voltage of 115 V so that smallelectronic devices can be connected. Thesedevices, such as games consoles, chargersand laptops, should not consume more thana maximum of 150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect hasa suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you arein.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedinto 115 V power socket:.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within apermissible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartmentand the cargo compartment areoperational (Y page 284).

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.

Features 285

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

286 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 318).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected a small electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 W, but a very high switch-oncurrent. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Tolog in, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sentto you by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

Features 287

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceedas follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audiosystem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, theInoperativeInoperative or Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in themultifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate as

expected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of thevehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Toregister, press the ï MB Info call button.If any of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.

288 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the CustomerAssistance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashescontinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network isunavailable, mbrace will not be able tomake the emergency call. If you leave thevehicle immediately after pressing the SOSbutton, you will not know whether mbraceplaced the emergency call. In this case,always summon assistance by othermeans.

Features 289

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message. The audiooutput is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 293).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-

Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiatea roadside assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for RoadsideAssistance call button: is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: flashes while the connection isbeing made. The multifunction display

290 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

shows the Connecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about otherproducts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audiosystem or on COMAND for ending atelephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.

Features 291

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data transfer ispossible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remoteunlocking may be delayed by 15 to60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can nolonger be opened remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at

292 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter contacts you and the local lawenforcement agency if the vehicle islocated.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the RoadsideRoadsideAssistance ConnectedAssistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis can be started, theRequest for vehicle diagnosisRequest for vehicle diagnosisreceived. Start vehicle diagnosis?received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X When the Please follow thePlease follow theinstructionsinstructions receivedreceived byby phonephone andandmove your vehicle to a safemove your vehicle to a safeposition.position. message appears, follow thecustomer service representative'sinstructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interruptedconnection may be//interruptedduringduring datadata transfer)transfer)message appears.

Features 293

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The vehicle data can now be sent to theCustomer Assistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 24).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.

Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by thenavigation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.Do you want to start routeDo you want to start routeguidance?guidance?message in the COMAND display.The route is saved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by thevehicle, a message will be sent to theCustomer Assistance center. The CustomerAssistance center then forwards thisinformation to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which wasexceeded

294 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via text message. Analarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes. Depending on the setting, the panicalarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody is

within the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsWhen programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 26).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Features 295

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 295).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 298).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be

necessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 295).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the program button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").

296 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat thesame programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.

Features 297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in thefootwell.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

298 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 300ASSYST PLUS .................................... 300Engine compartment ........................ 301Care .................................................... 305

299

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 302).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by ... DaysService A Exceeded by ... DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the% ora button on thesteering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear and

300 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

damage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequentintermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for longperiods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

Engine compartment 301

Maintenance

andcare

Z

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignitionsystem or fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notes on the oil levelDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oilover a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumptionmay be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.

302 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engine

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.To check the oil level with the engine atoperating temperature, switch the engineoff and wait for approximately five minutes.

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) engineoil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested and

Engine compartment 303

Maintenance

andcare

Z

approved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalyticconverter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 303).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 371).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 145).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

304 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuelfiller neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 372).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.If the washer fluid level drops below therecommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction displayprompting you to add washer fluid(Y page 259).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 373).

Care

General notes! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

Care 305

Maintenance

andcare

Z

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in positionNwhen washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

306 CareMaintenance

andcare

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheel

cleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. Use thecleaning product Paint Cleaner, which hasbeen approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 307

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due toincorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

308 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Or clean the exterior lightingwith cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used aswell.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Care 309

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the exhaust pipes! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhausttail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chromecare product tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! Observe the note on care provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if itbecomes dirty or corroded.X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,e.g. with a wire brush.

X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth ora brush.

X After cleaning, lightly grease the ball of theball coupling again.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

i You can also have the maintenance workon the ball coupling and the trailer towhitchcarried out by a qualified specialistworkshop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

310 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dry

Care 311

Maintenance

andcare

Z

afterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

312 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 314Where will I find...? ........................... 314Flat tire .............................................. 314Battery (vehicle) ................................ 316Jump-starting .................................... 320Towing and tow-starting .................. 322Fuses .................................................. 325

313

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kitX Open the tailgate.

X Remove first-aid kit: from the stowagenet.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the cargo compartmentfloor.X To remove the cargo compartmentstowage tray/cover: lift up the cargocompartment floor (Y page 281).

X Remove stowage tray: in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Remove cover; in the direction of thearrow.

= Lug wrench? Towing eyeA JackB Fuse allocation chartC Wheel boltsD One pair of glovesE Ratchet wrenchF Tire inflation compressorG Valve extractorH Folding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) (Y page 315)

314 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.RCollapsible spare wheelRan emergency spare wheel (only for certaincountries) (Y page 361)

Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 354).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 164).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 145).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 348).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 256).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.

Flat tire 315

Breakdow

nassistance

You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should therefore

have all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lightingsystem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) orESP® (Electronic Stability Program). Theoperating safety of your vehicle may berestricted. You could lose control of thevehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similarincident, contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Do not drive anyfurther. You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 67) and (Y page 69).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.

316 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on abattery.RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

Battery (vehicle) 317

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron andfaceguard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact aphysician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified

specialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock; see the separate operatinginstructions.On vehicles with COMAND and anavigation system, the clock is setautomatically.Rreset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. (Y page 94)Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 107)15.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

15 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

318 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhile still installed in the vehicle.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 320).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 320).

X Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.

Battery (vehicle) 319

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

320 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the automatic transmission to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

Jump-starting 321

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination couldrollover.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 366).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock and shift the automatictransmission toN. Then, turn the SmartKeyback to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.The automatic transmission must be inposition N when the vehicle is being towed.

322 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition Ni Deactivate the automatic locking feature(Y page 82). You could otherwise be lockedout when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. Thereis a risk of burns when removing the rearcover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intendto use the vehicle for towing, install the ballcoupling and connect the towbar to it(Y page 214).X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 314).

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are under thecovers at the front and at the rear on vehicleswithout a trailer coupling. On vehicles with atrailer coupling, the bracket is at the frontunder the cover.

Vehicles without the AMG Sports package

Vehicles with the AMG Sports packageX Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.Rear bumpers on vehicles with the AMGSports package: lift up cover: from thebumper by inserting a round, blunt objectinto the recess.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eyeclockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing and tow-starting 323

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedOnly possible for vehicles without4MATIC.When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 322).

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 115).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO keywith you.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 322).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 115).i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the indicatorlamps for the direction of travel flash. Afterresetting the combination switch, thehazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can beused to pull the vehicle onto a trailer ortransporter if you wish to transport it.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have ittransported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 320).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

324 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in astraight line when pulling out a vehicle thathas become stuck. Excessive tractivepower could damage the vehicles.

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care, especially so if the vehicle isladen.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with atrailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,using the tracks it made when it becamestuck.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"at (Y page 320).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric cables could beoverloaded. This could result in a fire. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the

components on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 164).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 145).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 145).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of thedashboardRFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the stowage well under thecargo compartment floor on the right-handside of the vehicle, when viewed in thedirection of travel

The fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the cargo compartment floor(Y page 314).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in thedashboard. You could damage thedashboard or the cover.

Fuses 325

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X To open: pull out cover: slightly at thebottom in the direction of arrow=.

X Pull cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow; and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front ofthe dashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: take lines; from the guides.X Open clamps:.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the rubber seal islying correctly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down cover and close clamps:.X Secure lines; in the guides.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the tailgate.

326 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

X To open: lift up cargo compartmentfloor;(Y page 281).

X Remove stowage compartment:.X Open cover= of fuse box downwards.

Fuses 327

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

328

Useful information ............................ 330Important safety notes .................... 330Operation ........................................... 330Winter operation ............................... 332Tire pressure ..................................... 334Loading the vehicle .......................... 342Maximum load rating ....................... 345Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 346Tire labeling ....................................... 347Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 351Changing a wheel ............................. 354Mounting a wheel ............................. 355Wheel and tire combinations ........... 359Emergency spare wheel ................... 361

329

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information andwarning notices onMOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 359).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" sectionModification work on the brake system andwheels is not permitted. The use of wheelspacers or brake dust shields is notpermitted. This invalidates the generaloperating permit for the vehicle.

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check thetire pressures and correct them ifnecessary.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling

330 OperationWheelsandtires

characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.This may indicate that the wheels or tiresare damaged. If you suspect that a tire isdefective, reduce your speed immediately.Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage.Hidden tire damage could also be causingthe unusual handling characteristics. If youfind no signs of damage, have the tires andwheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, may bedamaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage at least once amonth, as well as after driving off-road oron rough roads. Damaged wheels cancause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:- cuts in the tires- punctures- tears in the tires- bulges on tires- deformation or severe corrosion onwheels

RRegularly check the tire tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 331). If necessary,

turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other thanthe standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle. Do not use any other valve caps orsystems, e.g. tire pressure monitoringsystems.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the emergency sparewheel or thespare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,and correct the pressure as necessary(Y page 334).

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 361).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)

Operation 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 315).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, break them in atmoderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km), as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 361).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on drivingwithMOExtended tires in theevent of a flat tire can be found in the"Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 315).

Winter operation

Points to rememberHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 354).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter

332 Winter operationWheelsandtires

and do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 337).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tirepressure loss warning system(Y page 337).

X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 338).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wishto mount snow chains on steel wheels,make sure that you remove the respectivewheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps mayotherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:Rsnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 359).Ronly use snow chainswhen driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.Rlocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.Rdo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 70) when pulling away withsnow chains installed. You can therebyallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361).

Winter operation 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specificationsOperation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tires is the maximum tirepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle (Y page 342).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

i The specifications given on the followingTire and Loading Information placard areexamples. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The tire pressures

applicable to your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onyour vehicle.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in the

334 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

table for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 348).

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

i For vehicles towing a trailer, the full loadvalue on the tire pressure label located on

the inside of the fuel filler flap is valid forthe rear axle.

Option 3) The tire pressure for theemergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment) can befound:Rprinted in yellow on the rim of theemergency/collapsible spare wheelRin the "Wheel and tire combinations"section (Y page 359) in this Operator'sManualRon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure 335

Wheelsandtires

Z

To test tire pressure, use a suitable tirepressure gauge. The outer appearance of atire does not permit any reliable conclusionabout the tire pressure. On vehicles equippedwith the electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires and onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of theemergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the

336 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

recommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 334).

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "tire pressure information"section (Y page 334).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 334).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorActive Press 'OK' to RestartActive Press 'OK' to Restart messagewhich appears in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display. Information on themessage display can be found in the"Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem" section (Y page 338).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 334).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Tire pressure 337

Wheelsandtires

Z

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's sideA tire pressure table is also affixed to thefuel filler flap. The tire pressure losswarning system can only give reliablewarnings if you have set the correct tirepressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set,these incorrect values will be monitored.

X Observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 334).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2(Y page 145) in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button on thesteering wheel to select the TireTirePressurePressure menu.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors that monitorthe tire pressures in all four tires. The tirepressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if thecorresponding sensors are installed on allwheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutes

338 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

of driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display.

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressureelectronically" section (Y page 340).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 334). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 341). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 334).

Tire pressure 339

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating a pressure loss or malfunction.Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights upindicates whether a tire pressure is too low orthe tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, amessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Further information can be found on(Y page 256).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tirepressure warning lamp goes out after a fewminutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radio

headphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressureelectronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the TireTire pressurespressures willwill bebedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelis mounted, the system may continue toshow the tire pressure of thewheel that hasbeen removed for a few minutes. If thisoccurs, note that the value displayed forthe position where the spare tire ismounted is not the same as the sparewheel/emergency spare wheel's currenttire pressure.

340 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires hasdropped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 256).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.The tire pressure monitor then monitors thenew tire pressure values.

X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 334).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 334).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressures will beTire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 341

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible loadi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible load is vehicle-specific andmay deviate from the data shown here. Themaximum permissible load that applies foryour vehicle can be found on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Specification for maximum permissibleload: is listed on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

342 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

Number of seatsi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 345).

Loading the vehicle 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 343).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of theoccupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

344 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load andtrailer load/noseweight(maximumpermissible loadrating from the Tireand LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -540 lbs (245 kg)= 960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 345).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 342).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,

the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usuallyapproximately 8% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its load.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 342).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum load rating 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

Maximum tire load: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: tread wear:,tire traction; and heat resistance=. Alltires sold in North America are provided withthe corresponding quality class mark on thesidewall of the tire, even though theseregulations do not apply to Canada.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 332) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires can

346 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

reduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road isnot covered with ice or snow. Takeappropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labelingThe following markings are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation)and the manufacturer's name:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 351)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 350)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 345)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 336)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 351)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 348)D Load index (Y page 350)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 342).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 345).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 350).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

348 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.The maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires withmaximum speeds of over 186 mph

(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S16 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S16 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S16 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S16 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to theM+Smarking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding snow traction, andwere speciallydeveloped for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating for your vehicle as specified inthe "tires" section (Y page 359), e.g. if youbuy new tires.Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

16 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 349

Wheelsandtires

Z

Load index

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed ratingB(Y page 348) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 330).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

350 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall: and under tire tread;.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialusedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 351

Wheelsandtires

Z

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer includingthe weight of the load, luggage, accessoriesetc. on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of theaccessories, the total load limit and theweight of the optional equipment installed atthe factory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are theequivalent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

352 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 353

Wheelsandtires

Z

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section(Y page 314).Information on driving with MOExtended tiresin the event of a flat tire can be found under"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatcharacteristics" (Y page 315).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 355).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, ifnecessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitor.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressures.Information on changing tires and mountingthe spare wheel (Y page 354).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

354 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 145).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent itfrom rolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 314).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Mounting a wheel 355

Wheelsandtires

Z

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never

disengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

356 Mounting a wheelWheelsandtires

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and justin front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut ofthe jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

Mounting a wheel 357

Wheelsandtires

Z

bolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 354).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by thefactory

; Wheel bolts for the collapsible sparewheel

! Always use wheel bolts; to mount thecollapsible spare wheel. Using other wheelbolts to mount the collapsible spare wheelcould damage the brake system.

Be sure to use the original-length wheel boltswhen re-mounting the original wheel after ithas been repaired.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

X Inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 362).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor beforelowering the vehicle. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

358 Mounting a wheelWheelsandtires

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: toA). The tightening torquemust be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position andstore it together with the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the cargo compartment.

X Transport the faulty wheel in the cargocompartment.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlymounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 334).

For further information on stowing thecollapsible spare wheel, see (Y page 363).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

i The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Informationplacard with the recommended tirepressures on the B-pillar on the driver'ssideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Wheel and tire combinations 359

Wheelsandtires

Z

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operatingconditions (Y page 334).Check tire pressures regularly, and onlywhen the tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle documentwallet.

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims andtire sizes for equipping your vehicle withwinter tires. Winter tires are not availableat the factory as standard equipment oroptional extras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, incertain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The size of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axle

In the following table, the wheel/tirecombinations are assigned to the vehiclemodels through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 GLK 250 BlueTEC, GLK 350, GLK 3504MATIC

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

360 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1

FA

RA

235/50 R 19 99 V17

255/45 R 19 100 V17, 18

7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

#

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)

#

BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+S17 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

#

BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+SMOExtended19

7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

#

BA 235/45 R20 100 H XL M+S17 8.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

#

All-terrain tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)

#

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+Si17 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)

#

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel may

severely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.

17 USA: not for GLK 250 BlueTEC.18 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.19MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system.

Emergency spare wheel 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure asnecessary (Y page 334). The applicable valueis found on the wheel or under "Technicaldata" (Y page 359).

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warningsystem/the tire pressuremonitor when thedamaged wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:after mounting an emergency spare wheel,the system may still display the tirepressure of the removed wheel for a fewminutes. The value displayed for themounted emergency spare wheel is not thesame as the current tire pressure of theemergency spare wheel.

An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on theemergency spare wheel.

Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

Collapsible spare wheel

Removing the collapsible emergencyspare wheelThe collapsible spare wheel can be found inthe stowage well under the cargocompartment floor.X Lift the cargo compartment floor up(Y page 281).

X Remove stowage compartment:.X Turn retaining screw; counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel=.X Take the wheel bolts for the collapsiblespare wheel from the vehicle tool kit.

For further information on changing a wheeland mounting the spare wheel, see(Y page 314).

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor beforelowering the vehicle. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

362 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

X Pull connector? and the air hose out ofthe housing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on thecollapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: on the air hose onto thevalve.

X Make sure on/off switchA of the tireinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert plug? into the socket of thecigarette lighter (Y page 284) or into a 12 Vpower socket (Y page 284) in your vehicle.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1(Y page 145) in the ignition lock.

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than eight minutesat a time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tirepressure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA on theelectric air pump to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than thespecified pressure, press pressure releasebutton; until the correct tire pressure hasbeen reached.

X Unscrew union nut: on the air hose fromthe valve.

X Screw the cap onto the valve of thecollapsible spare wheel again.

X Stow plug? and the air hose in the lowersection of the blower housing.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in thevehicle.

Stowing a used collapsible spare wheelTake the following steps to stow a usedcollapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, thecollapsible sparewheel will not fit in the sparewheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou have this work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! Only place the collapsible spare wheel inthe vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,moisture may get into the vehicle.

X Remove the valve extractor from thevehicle tool kit.

X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve andrelease the air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.X Place the valve extractor back into thevehicle tool kit.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in theemergency spare wheel well under thecargo compartment and fasten in place.

Emergency spare wheel 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

Technical data

Collapsible emergency spare wheel20

Tires Wheels V1

185/75 – 17 98 PTire pressure: 280 kPa (2.8 bar/41 psi)

6.0 B x 17 H2 ET 25 #

i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

20 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.

364 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 366Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 366Warranty ............................................ 366Identification plates ......................... 366Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 367Vehicle data ...................................... 375Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 375Trailer tow hitch ................................ 376

365

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Information regarding technical data

General informationi The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

366 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); Paint code= VIN

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 367)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 366)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

Service products and filling capacities 367

Technicaldata

Z

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.DEFRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approvedproducts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

All models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

368 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline witha minimum octane rating of 91.

! Only use the fuel recommended.Operating the vehicle with other fuels canlead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuelrecommended for your vehicle. Do not useadditives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz; see"Additives". You can obtain furtherinformation fromany authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.

If standard premium-grade unleadedgasoline is unavailable and unleadedgasoline of a lower grade is used forrefueling, observe the followingprecautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds above 3000 rpm.Rnever refuel using fuel with an octanenumber lower than 87. Otherwise,engine failure could occur.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleadedgasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can beused.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 158).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel. More information aboutrecommended additives can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.

Service products and filling capacities 369

Technicaldata

Z

The quality of the fuel available in somecountries may not be sufficient. Residuecould build up as a result. In such cases, andin consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed withthe cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).Youmust observe the notes andmixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Only use commercially available vehicularULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD,15 ppm maximum sulfur content) thatmeets the ASTM D975 standard. If you donot refuel with ULSD, you may damage theBlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem of the vehicle.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel withgasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This mayotherwise result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 158).

Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl ester)Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. Theconcentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD maynot exceed 5% by volume.Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higherpercentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, candamage the engine and the fuel system. Forthis reason, they are not approved.For more information, consult the gas stationstaff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasolinepumpmust clearly state that the standard forULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is notclear, do not refuel the vehicle.Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unlessthey have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on refueling (Y page 159).

Low outside temperaturesi Diesel fuel with improved cold flowproperties is available during the wintermonths. Further information about fuelproperties can be obtained from oilcompanies, e.g. at gas stations.

DEF

Important safety notesComply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling DEF(Y page 367).DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.

370 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature ofapproximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle isdelivered from the factory equipped with aDEF preheating system. Winter operation canthus be guaranteed even at temperaturesbelow 12 ‡ (-11 †).

Additives! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO22241. Do not use additives with DEF anddo not dilute DEF with water. This maydestroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to otherservice products, cleaning agents or dust)lead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularlyimportant with respect to avoidingmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, it must not be returned tothe tank. The purity of the fluid can no longerbe guaranteed.

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity

GLK 250 BlueTEC 7.3 US gal(27.5 l)

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 367).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

GLK 350GLK 350 4MATIC

276 229.5

GLK 250BlueTEC

651 228.51,229.31,229.51

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Service products and filling capacities 371

Technicaldata

Z

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry outregular oil changes using an approved engineoil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake

fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 367).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at

372 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 367).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensures

adequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

i The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

GLK 350GLK 350 4MATIC

Approx. 8.9 US qt(8.4 l)

GLK 250 BlueTEC Approx. 10.4 US qt(9.8 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 367).

Service products and filling capacities 373

Technicaldata

Z

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R-134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant.Otherwise, the climate control system maybe damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.

Always have work on the climate controlsystem carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRthat it is necessary to have maintenancework carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

374 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model ::Openingheight

;;

Max.headroom

GLK 250BlueTEC

82.2 in(2087 mm)

77.0 in(1955 mm)

All othermodels

82.1 in(2086 mm)

76.9 in(1954 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models

Vehicle length 178.6 in (4536mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.4 in (2016 mm)

Wheelbase 108.5 in (2755mm)

Turning radius 38.2 ft (11.65 m)

Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)

GLK 250 BlueTEC

Vehicle height 66.7 in (1694 mm)

Ground clearance 8.0 in (204 mm)

GLK 350GLK 350 4MATIC

Vehicle height 66.7 in (1693 mm)

Ground clearance 8.2 in (208 mm)

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Fording depth

Fording depth: must not exceed 12 in(30 cm).For more information about off-road fording,see (Y page 170).

Vehicle data for off-road driving 375

Technicaldata

Z

Approach/departure angle

Front approach/departure angle: is amaximum of 22.5° and rear approach/departure angle; is a maximum of 24.3°.For further information about approach/departure angles, see (Y page 173).

Maximum gradient-climbingcapabilityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbingcapability depends on the off-road conditionsand the road surface conditions.The maximum gradient climbing capability is70%.

i If the load on the front axle is reducedwhen pulling away on a steep uphill slope,the front wheels have a tendency to spin.4ETS recognizes this and brakes thewheels accordingly. The rear wheel torqueis increased, making it easier to drive off.

For further information about the maximumgradient climbing ability, see (Y page 173).

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling system anddrive trainmay be necessary, depending onthe vehicle type.

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch(example): Anchorage points; Rear axle center line

Trailer loadsMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models

Permissible trailer load,unbraked

Permissible trailer load,braked21

3500 lbs(1588 kg)

Maximum drawbarnoseweight22

280 lbs(127 kg)

Permissible rear axleloadwhen towing a trailer

3108 lbs(1410 kg)

The actual noseweightmay not be higher thanthe value which is given. The value can befound on the trailer tow hitch or trailer

21 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.22 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.

376 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata

identification plates. The lowest weightapplies.The maximum permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight is the maximum weight withwhich the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limitfor Mercedes-Benz-approved trailercouplings.

Trailer tow hitch 377

Technicaldata

Z

378

379

380